IM ADR245B Feeder Protection20!4!2016

ADR245B
ADR245B
Feeder Protection Relay
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Doc ID : ADR245B_IM_01
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/TP
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 1 of 335
ADR245B
Preface
The A21F Feeder Management Relay Instruction Manual describes common aspects of feeder
protection application and use of product. It includes the necessary information to safety, install, set,
test, and operate the relay functionality. The instruction manual can be used by power engineers and
other experienced protective relaying applications.
It is not the intention of this manual to cover all details and variations in equipment/relay, nor does this
manual provide data for every possible contingency regarding installation or operation. The availability
and design of all features and options are subject to modification without notice.
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/TP
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 2 of 335
ADR245B
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment
provide full information of safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment and
also includes description of equipment label markings.
Documentation for equipment ordered from ASHIDA Electronics Pvt. Ltd. is dispatched
separately from manufacture goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore
this guide is provided to ensure that printed information normally present on equipment is
fully understood by the recipient.
The technical data in this safety guide is typical only see the technical data section of the
relevant product publication(s) for data specific to particular equipment.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents
of this Safety Guide and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is
installed, commissioned or serviced.
HEALTHY AND SAFETY

This information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure
that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with
the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts
of the equipment. Failure to warning notices, incorrect use, or improper handling may
endanger personnel / equipment, causing personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason only qualified personal may work on or operate the equipment.
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/SG
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 3 of 335
ADR245B
Qualified personnel are individuals who

• Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, operation of the equipment and of
the system to which it is being connected.
• Are able to safely perform switching operation in accordance with accepted safety
and to isolate ground and label it.
• Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering practices.
• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
The operating manual for the equipment gives instruction for its installation, commissioning
and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include
detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take
any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate person of Ashida Technical /
Sales office and request the necessary information.
SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the
equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the
equipment is installed or commissioned.
Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (Earth*) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.
Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) Terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or sub- assembly e.g. power supply.
*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT
OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 4 of 335
ADR245B
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING
Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment to be
aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The equipment documentation
should be consulted before installing, commissioning or servicing the equipment. Terminals
exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous
voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. Any disassembly of the equipment may
expose parts at hazardous voltage; also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable
electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all
personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections should
be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation
requirements are maintained for safety.
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire
size should be used. The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate
connection diagram.
Protection Class I Equipment

Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal,
if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected
equipment.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection
against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm² or as per
industries standard practice. The protective conductor (earth) connection must be of low-
inductance and as short as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential.
Before energizing the equipment, the following points should be checked:
• Voltage rating / polarity (rating label / equipment documentation);
• CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections;
• Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where applicable);
• Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
Accidental touching of exposed terminals

If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of electric
shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with IP20 rating, then a
suitable protective barrier should be provided.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 5 of 335
ADR245B
Equipment Use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the equipment front panel / cover

Removal of the equipment front panel / cover may expose hazardous live parts which must
not be touched until the electrical power is removed.
UL and CSA/CUL Listed or Recognized equipment

To maintain UL and CSA/CUL Listing / Recognized status for North America the equipment
should be installed using UL or CSA Listed or Recognized parts for the following items:
connection cables, protective fuses / fuse holders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp
terminals and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation.
For external protective fuses a UL or CSA Listed fuse shall be used. The Listed type shall be
a Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15A and a minimum D.C. rating
of 250 Vdc. for example type AJT15.
Where UL or CSA Listing of the equipment is not required, a high rupture capacity
(HRC) fuse type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a minimum D.C. rating of
250 Vdc. may be used, for example Red Spot type NIT or TIA.
Equipment operating conditions

The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and
environmental limits.
Current transformer circuits

Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal
to personnel and could damage insulation.
Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any
connections to it.
For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current
transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore
external shorting of the CTs may not be required, but it is advisable to use external CT
shorting as general practice.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 6 of 335
ADR245B
External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs)

Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the
equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched.
Battery replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and
be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings
and persons.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing

Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. After the
completion of test, to discharge capacitors the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero
before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and PCB cards

Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment
whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards

Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should
not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized. This is to avoid
possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the
extender card.
Fiber optic communication

Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly.
Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no
connections are energized.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 7 of 335
ADR245B
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Decommissioning:
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to
earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to
the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via
the external terminals prior to decommissioning.
Disposal:
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment
should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have
them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular
regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of batteries.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
Protective Fuse Rating

The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 8A, high
rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in
the technical data section of the equipment documentation. The protective fuse should be
located as close to the unit as possible.
DANGER - CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may produce Lethal
hazardous voltages 7.2 Protective Class
Protective Class
IEC Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment
60255-27: documentation).
2005
This equipment requires a protective conductor
EN 60255-
(earth) connection to ensure user safety.
27: 2005
Installation Category
IEC 60255-27.2005 : At 2.5kV, 50Hz between all terminals connected together and
Category III earth for 1 minute Distribution level, fixed installation.
(Overvoltage Category III) Equipment in this category is qualification tested at
5kV peak, 1.2/50µs, 500Ω, 0.5J, between all supply
circuits and earth and also between independent
circuits
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 8 of 335
ADR245B
Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an
outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will
enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of
protection IP52 (dust and splashing water protected).
Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety standards.

Altitude Operation up to 2000m
IEC 60255-27:2005
EN 60255-27: 2005
CE MARKING
Directives:
Compliance demonstrated by reference to safety standards
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 9 of 335
Page intentionally Left Blank
ADR245B
Table of Contents
Section 1 : Introduction and Specifications
Sr. No. Description Page No.

1 Introduction and Specifications 23
1.1 Overview 23
1.2 Features 23
1.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 27
1.4 Typical Tests Information 32
Section 2 : Installation and Procedure

2 INSTALATION AND PROCEDURE 39
2.1 Overview 39
2.2 Handling 39
2.2.1 Handling the Goods 39
2.2.2 Receipt of the Goods 39
2.2.3 Unpacking the Goods 39
2.2.4 Storing the Goods 40
2.2.5 Dismantling the Goods 40
2.3 Installation Procedure 40
2.3.1 Safe Mounting 40
2.3.2 Relay Connection and Diagram 44
2.3.3 Before Energizing following should be checked 44
2.3.4 Relay Operating Condition 44
2.3.5 Current Transformer (CT) Circuit 44
2.3.6 Insulation and dielectric strength testing 44
2.3.7 Cables and Connectors 44
2.3.8 Power Supply Connections 47
2.3.9 Earth Connection 47
2.4 Mechanical Dimensions and Electrical Connection 49
2.4.1 Mechanical Dimensions ADR245B 49
2.4.2 Mechanical Dimensions Modular ADR245B 50
2.4.3 Back Terminal and Electrical wiring connection diagrams for ADR245B 51
2.4.4 Back Terminal and Electrical connection diagram Modular ADR245B 53
Section 3 : PC SOFTWARE INFORMATION

3 PC SOFTWARE INFORMATION 60
3.1 Overview 60
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/ToC
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 11 of 335
ADR245B
3.1.1 RTV2 Software Features 60

3.2 Installation and Setup 61
3.2.1 System Requirement 61
3.2.2 Microsoft .Net Framework 3.5.1 61
3.2.3 Installing ASHIDA Relay-Talk System 62
3.2.4 Uninstalling and Repair ASHIDA Relay-Talk System 64
3.3 Procedure 65
3.3.1 ASHIDA Relay Talk System Version2 (RTV2 S/W) 65
3.3.2 Features in RTV2 Software 66
3.3.3 Standard Toolbar buttons 67
3.3.4 Download Device Template 68
3.4 Substation 69
3.4.1 Adding Substation to RT System 69
3.4.2 Import Substation 70
3.4.3 Export Substation 70
3.5 Bay 72
3.5.1 Adding Bay to Substation 72
3.5.2 Import Bay 73
3.5.3 Export Bay 73
3.6 Device 74
3.6.1 Adding New Device 74
3.6.2 Import Device 75
3.6.3 Export Device 76
3.7 Communication Setting 77
3.7.1 Editing connection settings of Device 77
3.7.2 Communicating with Device 78
3.8 Settings 79
3.8.1 To View Settings files from Device 79
3.8.2 Downloading Settings from Device 80
3.8.3 Restore Settings from Device 81
3.9 AProLogic 82
3.9.1 Read AProLogic 82
3.9.2 Edit and Write the AProLogic to a Device 83
3.9.3 View AProLogic Report 83
3.9.4 Restore AProLogic from Device 84
3.10 Events 85
3.10.1 Read Events 85
3.10.2 To View Events 86
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
3.11 History Faults 87

3.11.1 To read the History Faults from Device 87
3.11.2 To view the History Faults file 88
3.12 Alias 89
3.13 Control 90
3.14 Disturbance Record 90
3.14.1 Show the Disturbance Record from Device 90
3.14.2 Read Disturbance Record from Device 91
3.14.3 View Disturbance Record file 92
3.15 Measurements 93
3.16 Status 94
3.17 Options 94
3.17.1 System Folders Information 94
3.17.2 File Location Information 95
3.17.3 General Settings Information 96
Section 4 : PROTECTION FUNCTION & LOGIC FUNCTIONS

4 Protection function & Logic Functions 100
4.1 Overview 100
4.2 Application Data 101
4.3 General Settings 102
4.4 Phase Over current Element (50/51/67P) 104
4.4.1 Non Directional Phase Over current (50/51) 104
4.4.2 Directional Phase Over current (67P) 105
4.5 Ground Over current Element (50N/51N/67N) 107
4.5.1 Non Directional Ground Over current (50/N/51N) 107
4.5.2 Directional Ground Over current (67N) 108
4.6 Residual Over current Element (50N/51N/67N) 110
4.6.1 Non Directional Residual Over current (50/N/51N) 110
4.6.2 Directional Residual Over current (67P) 111
4.7 Sequence Overcurrent (46) 112
4.8 IDMT Characteristics 112
4.9 Under/Over Voltage (27/59) 115
4.10 Residual over Voltage (59N) 118
4.11 Sequence Overvoltage 119
4.12 VT Supervision 121
4.13 CT Supervision 124
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
4.14 Breaker Failure Setting (50BF) 126

4.15 Reclosing 128
4.16 Broken Conductor (46BC/50BC) 129
4.17 Programmable Logic control 131
Section 5 : MEASUREMENT SHEET

5 Measurement Sheet 136
5.1 Measurement 1 136
Section 6 : SETTING SHEET

6 Setting Sheet 141
6.1 General Settings: 141
6.2 Ip Configuration 142
6.3 Group 1 Phase Overcurrent 142
6.3.1 IP>1 function 142
6.4 Group 1 Ground Over current 143
6.4.1 IE>1 function 143
6.5 Group 1 Residual Over current 144
6.5.1 3I0>1 function 144
6.5.2 3I0>3 function 145
6.6 Group 1 Sequence Overcurrent 145
6.6.1 Seq.I>1 function 145
6.7 Group 1 Under/Over Voltage. 146
6.7.1 Under Voltage 146
6.7.2 Over Voltage 147
6.8 Group 1 Residual Over Voltage 147
6.9 Group1 Sequence Over Voltage 147
6.10 Group1 I2/I1 (46BC) 148
6.11 Group1 I0/I1 (50BC) 148
6.12 Group1 VT Supervision 149
6.13 Group1 CT Supervision 149
6.14 Group1 Reclosing 150
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Section 7 : COMMUNICATIONS

7 COMMUNICATIONS 154
7.1 MODBUS 154
7.2 MODBUS Protocol Map 154
7.3 IEC60-870-5-103 160
7.4 Physical Connection and Link Layer 160
7.5 Initialisation 160
7.6 Time Synchronisation 161
7.7 Spontaneous Events 161
7.8 General Interrogation (GI) 161
7.9 Cyclic Measurements 161
7.10 Commands 162
7.11 Disturbance Records 162
7.12 Configuration 162
7.13 Protocol Mapping: 162
7.14 IEC61850 Overview 167
Section 8 : USER GUIDE

8 User Guide Overview 184
8.1 FRONT PANEL AND CONTROL 184
8.2 User interface 185
8.2.1 LCD Display 185
8.2.2 Touch Keys 185
8.2.3 LEDS 186
8.2.4 Communication ports 187
8.3 EDITING PASSWORD and SAVING the SETTINGS 187
8.4 MENUS 189
8.4.1 Default Display 189
8.4.2 Main Menu List 189
8.4.2.1 Main Menu List Details 190
8.5.1 To View Measurement 1 196
8.7.1 To Set – General Settings 198
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
8.7.2 To View – General Settings 204

8.8 IP Configuration 205
8.8.1 To Set – IP Configuration 205
8.8.2 To View – IP Configuration 207
8.9 Phase Overcurrent 208
8.9.1 To Set – Phase Overcurrent 208
8.9.2 To View – Phase Overcurrent 213
8.10 Ground Overcurrent 214
8.10.1 To Set – Ground Overcurrent 214
8.10.2 To View – Ground Overcurrent 218
8.11 Residual Overcurrent 218
8.11.1 To Set – Residual Overcurrent 218
8.11.2 To View – Residual Overcurrent 222
8.12 Sequence Overcurrent 223
8.12.1 To Set – Sequence Overcurrent 223
8.12.2 To View – Sequence Overcurrent 226
8.13 Under/Over Voltage 226
8.13.1 To Set – Under/Over Voltage 226
8.13.2 To View – Under/Over Overcurrent 228
8.14 Residual Over Voltage 229
8.14.1 To Set – Residual Over Voltage 229
8.14.2 To View – Residual Over Voltage 230
8.15 Sequence Over Voltage 231
8.15.1 To Set – Sequence Over Voltage 231
8.15.2 To View – Sequence Over Voltage 233
8.16 I2/I1 (46BC) 233
8.16.1 To Set – I2/I1 (46BC) 233
8.16.2 To View – I2/I1 (46BC) 235
8.17 I0/I1 (50BC) 236
8.17.1 To Set – I0/I1 (50BC) 236
8.17.2 To View – I0/I1 (50BC) 237
8.18.1 To Set – VT Supervision 238
8.18.2 To View – VT Supervision 240
8.19.1 To Set – CT Supervision 241
8.19.2 To View – CT Supervision 243
8.20 Reclosing 244
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
8.20.1 To Set – Reclosing 244

8.20.2 To View – Reclosing 246
8.21 AProLogic 246
8.21.1 To Set – AProLogic 246
8.21.1.1 To Set –Sub menus List of OUTPUT, LED Green, LED Red and Boolean Logic 248
8.21.1.1.1 OUTPUT Contact Configurtion 248
8.21.1.1.2 LED Green Configurtion 248
8.21.1.1.3 LED Red Configurtion 248
8.21.1.1.4 Boolean Configurtion 248
8.21.1.2 List of the Sub menus of Status Configuration 251
8.22 Latch IO Setting 252
8.22.1 To Set – Latch IO Setting 252
8.23 AndEq Time Setting 254
8.23.1 To Set – AndEq Time Setting 254
8.24 Fault 1 257
8.24.1 To view – Fault 1 257
8.25 Status 259
8.25.1 To view – Status 259
8.26 Error Log 260
8.26.1 To view – Error Log 260
8.27 Date / Time Settings 261
8.27.1 To Set – Date / Time Settings 261
8.27.2 To view –Date / Time Settings 263
Section 9 : FLOW CHART

9 Flow Chart Overview 268
9.1 Main Menu 268
9.2 Flow Chart – EDIT and SAVE settings 269
9.3 Flow Chart – Measurement 1 270
9.3.1 To View – Measurement 1 270
9.5 Flow Chart – General Setting 272
9.5.1 To Set – General Setting 272
9.5.2 To View – General Setting 273
9.6 Flow Chart –IP Configuration 274
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B

9.7 Flow Chart – Phase Overcurrent 276
9.8 Flow Chart – Ground Overcurrent 278
9.9 Flow Chart – Residual Overcurrent 280
9.10 Flow Chart – Sequence Overcurrent 282
9.11 Flow Chart – Under/Over Voltage 284
9.11.2 To View – Under/Over Voltage 285
9.12 Flow Chart –Residual OverVoltage 286
9.12.1 To Set – Residual OverVoltage 286
9.12.2 To View – Residual OverVoltage 287
9.13 Flow Chart – Sequence OverVoltage 288
9.13.1 To Set – Sequence OverVoltage 288
9.13.2 To View – Sequence OverVoltage 289
9.14 Flow Chart – I2/I1 (46BC) 290
9.14.1 To Set – I2/I1 (46BC) 290
9.14.2 To View – I2/I1 (46BC) 291
9.15 Flow Chart – I0/I1 (50BC) 292
9.15.1 To Set – I0/I1 (50BC) 292
9.15.2 To View – I0/I1 (50BC) 293
9.16 Flow Chart – VT Supervision 294
9.17 Flow Chart – CT Supervision 296
9.18 Flow Chart – Reclosing 298
9.19 Flow Chart – AProLogic 300
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
9.19.1.1 To Set – AProLogic (OUT, LED G, LED R and Boolean Logic) 301
9.19.1.2 To Set – AProLogic (Status ) 305
9.20 Flow Chart – Latch IO 306
9.20.1 To Set – Latch IO 306
9.20.2 To View – Latch IO 307
9.21 Flow Chart – AndEq Time Setting 308
9.21.2 To View – AndEq Time Setting 309
9.22 Flow Chart – Fault 310
9.22.1 To View – Fault 1 310
9.23 Flow Chart – Status 311
9.23.1 To View – Status 311
9.24 Flow Chart – Error Log 312
9.24.1 To View – Error Log 312
9.25 Flow Chart –Date / Time 313
9.25.1 To Set – Date / Time 313
9.25.2 To View – Date / Time 314
Section 10 : ANALYZING EVENT AND DISTURBANCE RECORD

10 Analyzing Event and Disturbance Record 318
10.1 Overview 318
10.2 Event recording 318
10.3 Disturbance recording 319
10.4 Positive Sequence Over current function 319
Section 11 : TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

11 Testing and COMMISSIONING 325
11.1 Commissioning Test, Equipment Required. 325
11.2 Checking of External Circuitry 325
11.3 Check Relay Setting 326
11.4 Relay Testing 327
11.5 Pick up and Trip Test: 332
11.6 Testing of Binary Output: 334
11.7 LED Test: 334
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Section 1
Introduction and Specifications
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/I&S
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Contents
1 INTRODUCTION AND SPECIFICATIONS 23
1.1 Overview 23
1.2 Features 23
1.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 27
1.4 Typical Tests Information 32
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
1 INTRODUCTION AND SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 Overview
ASHIDA has designed economical & reliable Multifunction ADR245B Protection & Control
System. The simple and compact construction of ADITYA series ADR245B relay provides
integrated Protection, Control and Monitoring functions for Over head Transmission Lines,
Underground cables, and Distributed Feeders.
1.2 Features
Key Protection & Control Functions:
• Two Independent Settings Groups
• Directional / Non Directional Phase & Ground Over Current Function
(50/51/51N/51/67/67N)
• Four Independent Stages for Directional/Non Directional Phase Over Current
Protection
• Three Stages of Directional/Non Directional Ground Over Current Protection
• Internally Derived / Externally measured Ground Over Current (3I0>) Protection
• Inverse time Over Current Protection (IEC curves according to IEC60255)
• High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64R)
• Inverse & Definite time Negative Sequence Over Current Protection (46)
• Broken Conductor Protection (46BC)
• Negative sequence Over Voltage Protection (47)
• Under and Over Voltage Protections (27 /59)
• Externally measured / Internally calculated Residual Over Voltage Protection (59N)
• Multi shots (4-shots) Auto-reclosing function
• Breaker Failure detection (50BF)
• VT supervision function
• Trip circuit supervision function
• Programmable Inputs & Outputs
• CB Close / Trip from HMI
• Programmable & Target LEDs for indication with dual colours (8 nos.)
• Self Supervision of relay
• Metering function
• Disturbance Recording (10 nos.)
• Event Recording (512 nos.)
• Fault Recording on HMI display (10nos.)
• Non-Volatile memory
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
• Fully communicable with IEC standard open protocol IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS &
IEC 61850.
• Separate communication port for SCADA Communication
• PC front port communication for convenient relay settings
• User friendly local operation with key pad
• Large Liquid crystal display (20X4) with backlight
• Password Protection
Software Support
• Setting Editor.
• Programmable scheme logic Editor.
• Settings upload / download.
• Offline Settings Editor.
• Online Measurement.
• Disturbance analysis.
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Model and Options
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Applications
ADR245B numerical multifunction relay designed for Transmission line protection,
Underground cable & feeder protection, Machine protection, and shunt capacitor bank
protection applications. Relay designed with fast and selective tripping ensures the stability
and availability of electrical power system.
ADR245B relay apply for protection, control & monitoring of radial and ring main feeder to
achieve sensitivity and selectivity on phase and ground faults.
Fig1: Radial feeder application
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Fig2: Parallel Transformer feeder application
1.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
AC Measuring Input:
I. Measurement Accuracy Typical ± 2% at In for Phase and EF
II. Nominal Frequency Range 50/60 Hz (Selectable in ADR245B Menu)

For Current Inputs
III. Frequency measurement 45 Hz – 65 Hz

range
IV. Phase rotation ABC
Current Input:
I. CT secondary 1 / 5 Amp. (Selectable)
II. Nominal Burden at In < 0.20 VA at rated current (In)

(without tripping condition)
III. Thermal Withstand Capacity 100 x rated current (In) for 1sec
50 x rated current (In) for 3sec
4 x rated current (In) continuous for Phase and EF CT
IV. Measurement Linearity Linier up to 40 In

Range for Non – Offset AC
Current
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Voltage Input:
I. PT Nominal voltage (Vn) AC 63.5 Volts
II. Nominal Burden at Vn < 0.20 VA at rated voltage (Vn)

(without tripping condition)
III. Thermal Withstand Capacity 2.6 x rated voltage (Vn) for 10sec
2 x rated voltage (Vn) continuous
IV. Measurement Linearity Linier up to 120Volts

Range
Auxiliary Supply Input:
I. Nominal operating range 24 – 230V AC (50Hz / 60Hz) or

24 – 230V DC
II. Voltage operating range 80% of lower nominal range and 120% of upper nominal
range (For DC Supply)
80% of lower nominal range and 110% of upper nominal
range (For AC Supply)
III. Nominal Burden on 24 – 24 – 230 < 12 VA without status energize

230V Auxiliary Power VAC < 15 VA with all status & output energies
Supply
24 – 230 < 5 W without status energize
VDC < 6 W with all status & output energies
IV. Tolerable AC ripple Up to 15% of highest dc supply, As per IEC 60255-26:

2013
V. Relay power up time < 2.5 Sec
Opto Isolated Input:
I. Opto Isolated input operating 24 – 230 VDC

Range
II. Threshold Voltage for DC 21V +/- 3volts
Maximum operating voltage 250 VDC

range (RMS Voltage)
III. Drop out Within 85% of threshold voltage value
IV. VA Burden of Opto Isolated For each status < 1.5 Watt / VA
Status Input
V. Filtering Time < 40ms
VI. Logic input recognition time : For all Status filtering time + 5ms ± 5 ms
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Output contact:
I. Non Latching Continuous Continuous 5A/250Vac

contact
Make & carry Make & carry: 30Amp for 3sec AC /DC
Short time withstand Carry : 50Amp for 1sec AC /DC
Breaking capacity AC- 1250VA max @ 250V(PF 0.4)
DC- 100W Resistive max. 5A or 300V
50 Watt Inductive (L/R 45ms) max. 5A or 300V
Operating Time <10msec
Minimum no. of 10,000 operation loaded condition & unloaded

operations 100,000 operations
Accuracy of protection function:
I. Phase Over current:
For operating Pick-up Setting ±5%

Value
Minimum Trip Level of IDMT 1.05 x Setting ±5%
Drop –off 0.95 x Setting ±5%
For operating IDMT Characteristic shape As per class5 of 60255-151 cl.5.2**

Time or 50ms whichever is greater
DT Operation ±5% or 55ms whichever is greater*
Note “ * “ indicates Reference Condition that is Fault current 2 time

above set value .
II. Ground Over current:

Value


above set value.
III. Residual Over current:

Value

Rev No. : 01
ADR245B

above set value.
IV. Sequence Over current:
For operating Value Pick-up Setting ±5%
Minimum Trip Level of

1.05 x Setting ±5%
IDMT
For operating Time IDMT Characteristic As per class5 of 60255-151 cl.5.2**

shape or 50ms whichever is greater
Note “ * “ indicates Reference Condition that is Fault current 2

time above set value
V. under voltage:
For operating UV Pick-up Setting ±5%

Value
For operating Time DT Operation ±5% or 55ms whichever is greater*
Note “ * “ indicates Reference Condition that is Fault voltage

0.8 time of set value
VI. Over voltage:
Note “ * “ indicates Reference Condition that Fault voltage 1.2

time of set value
VII. Residual Over voltage:
Note “ * “ indicates Reference Condition that is Fault voltage 1.2

time of set value
VIII. Sequence Over voltage:
Note “ * “ indicates Reference Condition that Fault voltage 1.2

time of set value
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
IX. Broken Conductor (i2/i1)
For operating Value Pick-up 1.05 x Setting ±5%
For operating Time DT Operation ±5% or 55ms whichever is greater
X. Broken Conductor (i0/i1)
For operating Value Pick-up 1.05 x Setting ±5%
XI. VT Supervision:
XII. CT Supervision:
XIII. CB Fail:
Reset current Setting ±10%
CBF Reset <60ms
**Note: As per IEC60255-151 Class 5 (assigned error 5%) the tolerance calculated as below;
Value of characteristic quantity as multiple of setting value (GS) 2N 5N 10N 20N
Limiting error as multiple of an assigned error 2.5 1.5 1 1
Percentage for time accuracy claim 12.5% 7.5% 5% 5%
Operating condition:
I. Relative Humidity : Humidity (RH) 95% maximum
II. Operating temperature range : -25 ºC to +65 ºC
III. Storage temperature range : -25 ºC to +70 ºC
Terminals specification:
I. AC current and Voltage Input Terminals M5 Threaded terminals for ring lug
2
connection. Suitable up to 4 mm
II. Auxiliary & Input/output Terminals M4 Threaded terminal. Suitable up to 2.5

2
mm
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
III. Note on M4/M5 Terminal Torque Use torque control screw driver with 1.2 N-m
torque maximum
IV. Rear Communication Terminal D-9 connector two wire RS 485 signal levels
Suitable up to Multi core shielded
Mechanical & Environmental specification:
I. Design Flush mounting case
II. Weight 3.50 Kg approximate
III. Pollution Degree II
Drawing References:
I. Drawing : For Cabinet Type - MAC01302

References
: For Back Connections – Non-Drawout - ADV02606
: For Typical External connection – Non-Drawout - ADV02508
: For Cabinet Type - MAC01953
: For Back Connections - ADV02612
: For Typical External connection - ADV02519
1.4 Typical Tests Information

The Relay Confirm to following standard:
Electromagnetic Compatibility Type Test:
Sr. No. Standard Test
I. High Frequency IEC60255-22-1, : Frequency : 1MHz Damped Oscillatory

Disturbance Test IEC60255-26 : Longitudinal :2.5 KV Common Mode, 1 KV
(ed3) Differential Mode
: Duration: sec duration 2 sec.
: On Mains Port.
II. Electrostatic IEC60255-22-2, : IEC 61000-4-2 class III.

Discharge Test- IEC60255-26 : Contact discharge: 2, 4, 6 & 8kV,
Direct Application (ed3) : Air discharge: 2, 4 8 & 15KV
: Polarity: both +ve and –ve polarities.
IEC60255-22-4,
: Class A
Fast Transient IEC60255-26
III. : 4KV; 5/50ns; 5KHz & 100KHz: Repetition rate
Disturbance Test (ed3)
300ms; Both polarities; Ri = 50Ω; duration 1 min.
IEC60255-22-5, : Differential Mode = 1kV

Surge Immunity IEC60255-26 : Common Mode = 2kV
IV.
Test (ed3) : 1.2/50µs, 8/20µs 5 surges of each polarity
: On Mains Port and I/O Port
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
IEC60255-22-7,
Power
IEC60255-26
V. Frequency : Class-A
(ed3)
Immunity Test
VI. Power IEC61000-4-8, : 1000A/m FOR 3s, 300A/m for 1minute.

Frequency IEC60255-26
Magnetic Field (ed3)
Immunity Test
VII. Pulse Magnetic IEC61000-4-9, : TEST LEVEL 5, TEST specifications = 1000A/m

Field Immunity IEC60255-26 field applied in all planes
Test (ed3)
VIII. Radiated IEC60255-22-3 : 10V/m, Performance Class-A

Electromagnetic , : 10V/m, freq = 80MHz to 1GHz and 1.4GHz to
Field Disturbance IEC60255-26 2.7GHz. 80% AM at 1kHz.
Test (ed3)
IX. Conducted IEC60255-22-6, : Freq. 150kHz – 80MHz, Amplitude 10 V,

Disturbance IEC60255-26 Modulation 80% AM @ 1 KHz.
Induced By (ed3)
Radio Frequency
Field
X. Power Supply IEC60255-11 & : DC voltage dip:

Immunity Test IEC61000-4-11 40% dip 200ms and 70% for 500ms for DC
10 & 20ms without loss of protection for DC
30ms, 50ms, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 0.5s, 1s and
5s with temporary loss of protection for DC
AC voltage dip:
10, 20ms without loss of protection for AC
50ms, 100ms, 200ms, 0.5s, 5s with temporary
loss of protection
Conducted & IEC60255-25, : Conducted

Radiated IEC60255-26 0.15MHz - 0.5MHz, 79dB (microV) Q-Peak, 66dB
frequency (ed3) (microV) for average
Emission Test
0.5MHz - 30MHz, 73dB (microV) Q-Peak, 60dB
XI. (microV) for average
Radiated (3mtr)
30MHz - 230MHz, 50dB (microV) Q-Peak,
230MHz - 1GHz, 57dB (microV) Q-Peak,
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Insulation Tests:
I. High Voltage IEC60255-27 : At 2kV 50Hz between all terminal connected

Test together and earth for 1 minutes
II. Impulse Voltage IEC60255-27 : Test voltage: 5KV (peak) 1.2 / 50us,
Test : Energy :0.5 J,
: Polarity : + ve and – Ve
: Nos. of impulses : 3 positive and 3 negative
impulse
: Duration between Impulses : 5 sec.
III. Insulation IEC60255-27 : ≥ 100MΩ @ 500V DC

Resistance
Environmental tests:
I. Cold test : IEC-60068-2-1
II. Dry heat test : IEC-60068-2-2
III. Damp heat test, steady state : IEC-60068-2-78
IV. Change of Temperature : IEC-60068-2-14
V. Damp heat test, cyclic : IEC-60068-2-30
VI. Enclosure Protection Test (IP54) : IEC 60529
CE compliance
I. Immunity : IEC-60255-26
II. Emissive Test : IEC- 60255-26
III. Low voltage directive : EN-50178
Mechanical tests
: IEC 60255-21-1 class 2

Vibration
I. : Frequency Range = 10Hz – 150Hz , acceleration. = 2gn
Endurance Test
: Sweep rate 1 octave/min; 20 cycle in 3 orthogonal axis.
: IEC 60255-21-1 class 2

Vibration : Frequency Range = 10Hz – 150Hz , acceleration. = 1gn
II.
Response Test : Sweep rate 1 octave/min; Displacement =0.075mm, in 3
orthogonal axis.
III. Bump Test : IEC 60255-21-2 Class-1
: 1000 bumps / direction of 10gn peak acceleration and 16ms pulse
duration in each of the two opposite direction per axis as per No. of
axes. 3.
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
IV. Shock Withstand : IEC 60255-21-2 Class-1

Test : 3 shocks of 15gn peak acceleration and 11ms pulse in each of two
opposite direction. No. of axis : 3
V. Shock Response : IEC 60255-21-2 Class-2
Test : 3 shocks of 10gn peak acceleration and 11ms pulse in each of two
opposite direction. No. of axis : 3
VI. Seismic Test : IEC 60255-21-3 Class-2
: Sweep 1/Axis (@a sweep rate of 1 octave/minute) vibration in the
frequency range (5-35 Hz) at displacement X-axis: 7.5mm, Y-axis:
3.5mm amplitude of 3.5mm with acceleration of X-axis: 2gn, Y-axis:
1gn.
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Section 2
Installation and Procedure
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/I&P
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Contents
2 INSTALATION AND PROCEDURE 39
2.1 Overview 39
2.2 Handling 39
2.2.1 Handling the Goods 39
2.2.2 Receipt of the Goods 39
2.2.3 Unpacking the Goods 39
2.2.4 Storing the Goods 40
2.2.5 Dismantling the Goods 40
2.3 Installation Procedure 40
2.3.1 Safe Mounting 40
2.3.2 Relay Connection and Diagram 44
2.3.3 Before Energizing following should be checked 44
2.3.4 Relay Operating Condition 44
2.3.5 Current Transformer (CT) Circuit 44
2.3.6 Insulation and dielectric strength testing 44
2.3.7 Cables and Connectors 44
2.3.8 Power Supply Connections 47
2.3.9 Earth Connection 47
2.4 Mechanical Dimensions and Electrical Connection 49
2.4.1 Mechanical Dimensions ADR245B 49
2.4.2 Mechanical Dimensions Modular ADR245B 50
2.4.3 Back Terminal and Electrical wiring connection diagrams for ADR245B 51
2.4.4 Back Terminal and Electrical connection diagram Modular ADR245B 53
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
2 INSTALATION AND PROCEDURE
2.1 Overview
The first steps in applying the ADR245B Feeder Protection Relay are installing and
connecting the relay. This section describes common installation features and requirements.
To install and connect the relay safely and effectively, you must be familiar with relay
configuration features and options. You should carefully plan relay placement, cable
connections, and relay communication.
This section contains drawings of typical ac and dc connections to the ADR245B. Use these
drawings as a starting point for planning your particular relay application.
2.2 Handling
2.2.1 Handling the Goods

Our products are of robust construction but require careful treatment before installation on
site. This section discusses the requirements for receiving and unpacking the goods, as well
as associated considerations regarding product care and personal safety.
Caution: Before lifting or moving the equipment, you should be familiar

with the Safety Information chapter of this manual.
2.2.2 Receipt of the Goods

On receipt, ensure the correct product has been delivered. Unpack the product immediately
to ensure there has been no external damage in transit. If the product has been damaged,
make a claim to the transport contractor and notify us promptly.
For products not intended for immediate installation, repack them in their original delivery
packaging.
2.2.3 Unpacking the Goods

When unpacking and installing the product, take care not to damage any of the parts and
make sure that additional components are not accidentally left in the packing or lost. Do not
discard any CDROMs or technical documentation. These should accompany the unit to its
destination substation and put in a dedicated place.
The site should be well lit to aid inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and
excessive vibration. This particularly applies where installation is being carried out at the
same time as construction work.
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
2.2.4 Storing the Goods

If the unit is not installed immediately, store it in a place free from dust and moisture in its
original packaging. Keep any de-humidifier bags included in the packing. The de-humidifier
crystals lose their efficiency if the bag is exposed to ambient conditions. Restore the crystals
before replacing it in the carton. Bags should be placed on flat racks and spaced to allow
circulation around them. The time taken for regeneration will depend on the size of the bag. If
a ventilating, circulating oven is not available, when using an ordinary oven, open the door
on a regular basis to let out the steam given off by the regenerating silica gel. On subsequent
unpacking, make sure that any dust on the carton does not fall inside. Avoid storing in
locations of high humidity. In locations of high humidity the packaging may become
impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose their efficiency.
The device can be stored between –25º to +65ºC
2.2.5 Dismantling the Goods

If you need to dismantle the device, always observe standard ESD (Electrostatic Discharge)
precautions.
The minimum precautions to be followed are as follows:
• Use an antistatic wrist band earthed to a suitable earthing point.

• Avoid touching the electronic components and PCBs.
2.3 Installation Procedure

2.3.1 Safe Mounting
ADR245B supports flush panel mounting and can be mounted into panels using fitting
clamps with M5 X 10 screws.
The fitting clamp and screws are supplied along with the relay.
For mounting the relay in to the panel follow this procedure
By loosening the M5 x 10 screws, remove the fitting clamps on the relay and then insert the
Relay in to the panel cut-out as show below.
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Figure 1: Inserting relay in to the panel cut-out
After inserting the Relay in the Panel using the Fitting clamps and the M5 x 10 Screws fasten
the relay to the Panel as shown below.
Figure 2: Tightening Fitting clamps
Caution: All screws of fitting clamps to be properly tightened. Always

use M5x10 screws for fitting the clamps. Screws for fitting the
clamps.
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
The Relay after fastening to the Panel with the help of Fitting clamps and the M5 x 10
Screws is shown below.
Figure 3: Relay mounted on the panel-front view
Figure 4: Relay mounted on the panel-rear view
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
The ADR245B modular version relay can be mounted into panels using M6 X 15 screws.
For mounting the relay in to the panel follow this procedure
After inserting the Relay in the Panel using the M6 x 15 Screws fasten the relay to the Panel
as shown below.
Figure 5: Tightening Fitting clamps
Caution: All screws to be properly tightened. Always use M6 X15

screws for fitting of the relay.
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
2.3.2 Relay Connection and Diagram

Before installation of the relay check the correct working procedure as to ensure safety. The
Terminal exposed during installation may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment
is electrically isolated. Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts to hazardous
voltage. Electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic discharge (ESD)
precautions are not taken. Voltage and current connection should be made using insulated
crimp termination to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for
safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for
wire size should be used. The equipment must be connected in accordance with the
appropriate connection diagram.
2.3.3 Before Energizing following should be checked

1. Voltage rating and polarity.
2. CT circuit rating and integrity of connection.
3. Protective fuse rating.
4. Integrity of the earthing connection.
5. Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable as per application.
2.3.4 Relay Operating Condition

The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.
2.3.5 Current Transformer (CT) Circuit

Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT as the high voltage produce may be lethal to
personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT
must be shorted before opening any connection to it.
2.3.6 Insulation and dielectric strength testing

Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of
each part test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, as
this may result in damage.
2.3.7 Cables and Connectors

This section describes the type of wiring and connections that should be used when installing
the device. For pin-out details please refer to the wiring diagrams.
Caution: Before carrying out any work on the equipment, you should
be familiar with the Safety Section and the ratings on the
equipment’s rating label.
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Figure 6: Rear view-Terminal Connection of ADR245B basic version
Figure 7: Rear view-Terminal Connection of ADR245B modular version
Terminal Blocks
CT/Auxiliary power/Input/ Output connections
The use terminal blocks used for ADR245B devices are as shown below.
The terminal block of ADR245B basic version consists of up to 24 x M5 screw terminals and
40 x M4 screw terminals. M5 terminal blocks are used for CT and PT connections and M4
terminal blocks are used for auxiliary power/ input/output connections. The wires should be
terminated with rings using 90° ring terminals, with no more than two rings per terminal. The
product is supplied with sufficient M5 & M4 screws for proper connection.
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
M4 Terminal block M5 Terminal block
Figure 8: Terminal blocks
Caution: Always fit an insulating sleeve over the ring terminal.
Rear Serial Port connection

The rear serial port is intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a remote
SCADA system. The physical connectivity is achieved using this terminal for signal
connection. The terminal block is located at the rear of the relay as shown below.
Figure 9: Rear Serial port terminal block
The terminal block of ADR245B Modular version consists of up to 36 x M5 screw terminals

and two numbers of 5 pin phoenix connectors and 17 pin phoenix connectors depends upon
the no of I/O cards. M5 terminal blocks are used for CT and PT connections and 5 pin
terminal blocks are used for auxiliary power and RS 485 communication, and 17 pin
terminals are used for input/output connections.
Figure 10: Terminal blocks
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Caution: Always fit an insulating sleeve over the ring or pin terminal.
Rear Serial Port connection

The rear serial port is intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a remote
SCADA system. The physical connectivity is achieved using this terminal for signal
connection. The terminal block is located at the rear of the relay as shown below.
Figure 11: Rear Serial port terminal block
2.3.8 Power Supply Connections

These should be wired with 1.5 mm PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire terminated
with M4 ring terminals. The wire should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 V RMS.
As per the application, in case auxiliary supply input of the relay needs to be wired, then
adequate care should be taken to wire as per polarity marking on the Terminal sticker at the
rear of the relay. The supply range is also mentioned on the Terminal sticker and before
energising, care should be taken to confirm that the auxiliary supply being wired is within
range.
2.3.9 Earth Connection

Every device must be connected to the cubicle earthing bar. Earthing terminal is provided on
back side of the relay. Ensure that the relay earthing is connected to the local earth bar. With
several relays present; make sure that the copper earth bar is properly installed for solidity
connecting to the earthing terminal of each relay equipment box.
Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal,
(if provided) or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected
equipment. The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the
protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost. The
recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm² or as per industries
standard practice. The protective conductor (earth) connection must be of low-inductance
and as short as possible.
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Note: To prevent any possibility of electrolytic action between brass or copper ground conductors
and the rear panel of the product, precautions should be taken to isolate them from one
another. This could be achieved in several ways, including placing a nickel-plated or
insulating washer between the conductor and the product case, or using tinned ring
terminals.
Current Transformers
Current transformers would generally be wired with 2.5 mm2 PVC insulated multi-stranded
copper wire terminated with M5 ring terminals. The wires should be terminated with rings
using 90º rings terminals, with no more than two rings per terminal.
Due to the physical limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size you can use is 4.0
mm2 using ring terminals.
The wire should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 V RMS.
Caution: Current transformer circuits must never be fused.
Note 1: Terminal blocks must not be detached whilst any current transformer (CT) circuit is live. CT
shorting must be achieved by external means; the product does not include this facility.
Note 2: For 5A CT secondary, we recommend using 2 x 2.5 mm2 PVC insulated multi-stranded
copper wire.
EIA(RS)485 Connections
For connecting the EIA (RS485), use screened cable with a maximum total length of 1000 m
or 200 nF total cable capacitance.
A typical cable specification would be:
2
Each core: 16/0.2 mm copper conductors, PVC insulated
2
Nominal conductor area: 0.5 mm per core
Screen: Overall braid, PVC sheathed
There is no electrical connection of the cable screen to the device. The link is provided
purely to link together the two cable screens.
Output Relay Connections

These should be wired with 1 mm PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire terminated with
M4 ring terminals.
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
2.4 Mechanical Dimensions and Electrical Connection

2.4.1 Mechanical Dimensions ADR245B
Figure 12: Case dimensions for basic version
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
2.4.2 Mechanical Dimensions Modular ADR245B
Figure 13: Case dimensions for modular version
Note: All dimensions in mm.
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
2.4.3 Back Terminal and Electrical wiring connection diagrams for ADR245B
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
2.4.4 Back Terminal and Electrical connection diagram Modular ADR245B
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Section 3
PC Software Information
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/PC-SI
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
Contents
3 PC SOFTWARE INFORMATION 60
3.1 Overview 60
3.1.1 RTV2 Software Features 60
3.2 Installation and Setup 61
3.2.1 System Requirement 61
3.2.2 Microsoft .Net Framework 3.5.1 61
3.2.3 Installing ASHIDA Relay-Talk System 62
3.2.4 Uninstalling and Repair ASHIDA Relay-Talk System 64
3.3 Procedure 65
3.3.1 ASHIDA Relay Talk System Version2 (RTV2 S/W) 65
3.3.2 Features in RTV2 Software 66
3.3.3 Standard Toolbar buttons 67
3.3.4 Download Device Template 68
3.4 Substation 69
3.4.1 Adding Substation to RT System 69
3.4.2 Import Substation 70
3.4.3 Export Substation 70
3.5 Bay 72
3.5.1 Adding Bay to Substation 72
3.5.2 Import Bay 73
3.5.3 Export Bay 73
3.6 Device 74
3.6.1 Adding New Device 74
3.6.2 Import Device 75
3.6.3 Export Device 76
3.7 Communication Setting 77
3.7.1 Editing connection settings of Device 77
3.7.2 Communicating with Device 78
3.8 Settings 79
3.8.1 To View Settings files from Device 79
3.8.2 Downloading Settings from Device 80
3.8.3 Restore Settings from Device 81
3.9 AProLogic 82
3.9.1 Read AProLogic 82
3.9.2 Edit and Write the AProLogic to a Device 83
3.9.3 View AProLogic Report 83
3.9.4 Restore AProLogic from Device 84
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.10 Events 85
3.10.1 Read Events 85
3.10.2 To View Events 86
3.11 History Faults 87
3.11.1 To read the History Faults from Device 87
3.11.2 To view the History Faults file 88
3.12 Alias 89
3.13 Control 90
3.14 Disturbance Record 90
3.14.1 Show the Disturbance Record from Device 90
3.14.2 Read Disturbance Record from Device 91
3.14.3 View Disturbance Record file 92
3.15 Measurements 93
3.16 Status 94
3.17 Options 94
3.17.1 System Folders Information 94
3.17.2 File Location Information 95
3.17.3 General Settings Information 96
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3 PC SOFTWARE INFORMATION
3.1 Overview
ASHIDA Provides following Software solution to support the ADR245B Feeder Protection
Relay and the other ASHIDA products.
Sr. No. Application Software Description
1 RTV2 Software Customizes ADR245B Settings and configure

communication, input and output for specific
applications
2 Relay Assist Software Commissioning Assistance tool
3 Relay-DRV Com Trade Disturbance Record viewer
This section describes how to get started with the ADR245B and RTV2 software. It
particularly explains about the software setup and working procedure.
3.1.1 RTV2 Software Features
Connections ADR245B is connected to the PC through Front port as well as

Rear port.
Settings Editor Provides online as well as offline utility to interface with ASHIDA
Relay series,
AProLogic Allows user to program the inputs, outputs and LEDs
Events Provides event analysis tools.
History Faults Provides History fault analysis tool

Disturbance Record Provides oscillography analysis tools.
Time Synchronization Local clock time synchronized data is available.
Measurements Provides online power system parameter measurements

Status Provides status of the input, output and protection functions tool.
Control Provides the control function tool (output, input, LED)
Alias Allows user to label the outputs and inputs.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.2 Installation and Setup

3.2.1 System Requirement
ASHIDA Relay Talk System Version2 requires the following hardware/software platform to
run the application
Sr. No. Requirement Description
1 Operating System Windows XP/7/8 (32-bit or 64-bit)
2 Processors 1GHz or above
3 RAM 512MB or above
4 Dot net Framework Microsoft .Net Framework 3.51
3.2.2 Microsoft .Net Framework 3.5.1

Turn windows features on for “Microsoft .Net Framework” Check the Microsoft .Net
Framework and click Ok. If “.Net” feature is not available then use following link to download
.Net Framework:http://www.microsoft.com/en-in/download/details.aspx?id=21.If the link
above fails to work, you may need to search in http://www.microsoft.com for Microsoft .Net
Framework 3.5.1
Figure 1: Turn windows features on or off
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.2.3 Installing ASHIDA Relay-Talk System

The ASHIDA Relay-Talk System is delivered as a single installation file named ‘ASHIDA
Relay-Talk System.exe’. To install ‘ASHIDA Relay-Talk System’ simply open these file and
follow the directions.
To install, double click on “ASHIDA Relay-Talk SystemSetup.exe” setup file. Following
window will appear.
Figure 2: Startup screen of Relay Talk System Version2
Figure 3: Installing ASHIDA Relay Talk System V2
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
Figure 4: Relay Talk System Version2 setup installation complete
This completes the installation of ASHIDA Relay-Talk System. Click “Finish” and start using
ASHIDA Relay-Talk System.
In addition to installing the required files on your system the installation application performs
the following steps.
 Creates entries in the Start->Programs menu to access the features of the ASHIDA
Relay-Talk System
Figure 5: Relay Talk System Version2 in programs menu
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.2.4 Uninstalling and Repair ASHIDA Relay-Talk System

Step1: To Uninstall the software go to windows Control Panel −>‘Add/Remove Programs’.
Figure 6: Relay Talk System Version2 in Programs
Step2: Right click on ASHIDA Relay-Talk System
Figure 7: Confirmation to un-install Relay Talk System Version2
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
Step3: To uninstall Relay Talk System Version2 click yes button.
Relay Talk System Version2 -Uninstallation in Progress
3.3 Procedure
3.3.1 ASHIDA Relay Talk System Version2 (RTV2 S/W)

This section will guide the user for using ASHIDA Relay Talk System Version2, do the
configuration for ASHIDA of devices and interface with the device.
To start Relay Talk System Version2:
• Click Start−>Programs −> ASHIDA−> Relay Talk−> ASHIDA Relay-Talk System V2
• Or click ASHIDA RelayTalk.exe in the Install directory (e.g. C:\Program Files
\ASHIDA\Relay Talk\ ASHIDA RelayTalk.exe)
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
Relay Talk System Version2 -Main Screen

Following is the main screen of ASHIDA Relay Talk System Version2.
Figure 8: Main window of Relay Talk System Version2
3.3.2 Features in RTV2 Software

• Connection: Edit connection preference settings to interface with ASHIDA Relay
Series.
• Settings: This function is to edit settings in online/offline mode. Also to read and
write Settings from/to device.
• Event list: Can view the event list from device in online mode.
• Disturbance Record viewer: Can view the Disturbance record from device in online
mode.
• History Faults: Can read the History Faults from Device with time and date in Online
and Offline mode.
• Parameter View: Can read all Analog parameters, Digital status from relay in online
mode.
• Status: Can read various events/Faults with date time online.
• Control: Can perform control operations
• Alias: This function is to edit DI/DO labels.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.3.3 Standard Toolbar buttons

Following figure shows description of toolbar buttons:
Close: Application Exit
About: Display application
Time Synchronize
Device Refresh: To
Write: Send data to
Read: Read data to selected

Disconnect: Disconnect to
Connect: Connect to the
Delete: Delete the
Add: Add the
Refresh System: Refresh the
Download Device Templates
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.3.4 Download Device Template

To Download Device template Click on “Download Device Template”. Following window will
appear.
Figure 9: Download Device Template screen
Figure 10: Download Device Template

Write Web URL and click save. Then click on Refresh button to check available Device
templates. Select suitable Device template to download, and click on Download button.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.4 Substation
3.4.1 Adding Substation to RT System
To add new substations right click on “RT System”. Following context menu will appear.
Figure 11: Add new substation
Now click on “New Substation” following window will appear.
Figure 12: Write new substation name
Type a substation name and click OK. A new substation will be added in RT System.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.4.2 Import Substation

To import substation right click on “RT System”. Following context menu will appear.
Figure 13: Import substation

Now click on “Import Substation” .In the “Import substation” dialogue select a system archive
to import and click Open.
3.4.3 Export Substation

To export substation right click on substation. Following context menu will appear.
Figure 14: Export substation

Now click on “Export Substation” following window will appear.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
Figure 15: Export substation dialogue
In the “Export substation” dialogue, select a destination path and click Ok.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.5 Bay
3.5.1 Adding Bay to Substation

To add a new Bay right clicks on substation. Following context menu will appear.
Figure 16: Add new Bay
Click on “New Bay” following window will appear.
Figure 17: Add new bay name
Type a bay name and click OK. A new bay will be added to RT System.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.5.2 Import Bay

To import bay right click on substation. Following context menu will appear.
Figure 18: Import Bay
Now click on “Import Bay” .In the “Import Bay” dialogue select a system archive to import and
click Open.
3.5.3 Export Bay

To export bay right click on Bay. Following context menu will appear.
Figure 19: Export Bay
Now click on “Export Bay” following window will appear.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
Figure 20: Export Bay Dialogue
In the “Export Bay” dialogue, select a destination path and click Ok.
3.6 Device
3.6.1 Adding New Device
To add a device right click on bay and select “New Device”
Figure 21: Add new device
After Downloading the device template, Click on Add Device then list of Available Device
templates will display as follows:
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
Figure 22: Enter device name
Choose suitable Device template from available types, type a device name and click Ok.
New Device will be added to selected bay.
3.6.2 Import Device

To import device right click on bay. Following context menu will appear.
Figure 23: Import Device
Now click on “Import Device” .In the “Import Device” dialogue select a system archive to
Import and click open.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.6.3 Export Device

To export device right click on Device. Following context menu will appear.
Figure 24: Export Device
Now click on “Export Device” following window will appear.
Figure 25: Export Device dialogue
In the “Export Device” dialogue, select a destination path and click Ok.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.7 Communication Setting
3.7.1 Editing connection settings of Device

To Edit or Initialize Serial communication Settings Double click on Connection button.
Following window will appear on screen.
Figure 26: Serial Connection
Figure 27: Communication settings
Edit communication settings as required and click Finish to save.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.7.2 Communicating with Device

Once the communication settings are complete, then Device can communicate using
ASHIDA Relay Talk System Version2.The Configurator internally uses a separate
communication driver to communicate with the device. This communication driver
communicates with the device using communication parameters (e.g. com port, baud rate,
parity) supplied in device connection. Status of this driver is reflected in bottom status bar at
the rightmost corner.
Figure 28: Offline/Online status
It is 'offline' in red background at the start of the system & turns to 'online' in green
background, once the driver successful loaded. No communication with the device is
possible till the driver is successfully started & is 'online’. Select the device and then click on
Connect button.
Figure 29: Connect to device
After successful communication device name will turn into green color.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.8 Settings
3.8.1 To View Settings files from Device

Stored settings can see under Settings node like 000.set etc.
To read the settings from device double click on Settings file, then following settings menu
will appear on screen.
Figure 30: ViewSettings File
Note: - Settings with gray colored lines are Read-Only Settings.To edit the editable settings
double click on the same.
Figure 31: Edit settings file
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.8.2 Downloading Settings from Device

To download settings from device, right click on Settings node. Following window will appear.
Figure 32: Read device settings
Click “Read Device Settings” to read the settings file. Following window will appear
Figure 33: Read settings file name
Type a setting file name and click Ok. It will download the device template.
After successfully reading the settings file of the device double click on set file. Following
window will appear.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
Figure 34: New setting files display
3.8.3 Restore Settings from Device

If there is no settings file available, it can be retrieve using “Restore Settings File” from
Device Template.
To restore settings from device, right click on Settings node. Following window will appear.
Figure 35: Restore setting files
Click “Restore Settings File” to restore the settings.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.9 AProLogic
3.9.1 Read AProLogic

To read new AProLogic file from the device right click on AProLogic and select 'Read
AProLogic’. To open existing AProLogic file, double click on *.apl file.
Figure 36: Read AProLogic
Save as dialog box will appear for saving the name of the file. Click OK to save the file.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.9.2 Edit and Write the AProLogic to a Device

Select a device and expand AProLogic node. Double click on iom file and the file will open in
the main document window. Select output, assign applicable inputs. Edit TOperating, TReset
and HR/SR.
Figure 37: Edit TOperating, TReset and HR/SR
3.9.3 View AProLogic Report

To view AProLogic Report open “*.apl” file and click on Report Option.
Figure 38: Save & Report
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
Figure 39: AProLogic Report
3.9.4 Restore AProLogic from Device

If there is no settings file available, it can be retrieve using “Restore Settings File” from
Device Template.
To restore AProLogic from device, right click on AProLogic node. Following window will
appear.
Figure 40: Restore AProLogic files
Click “Restore AProLogic File” to restore AProLogic.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.10 Events
The event records can view directly on relay screen, or can view in ASHIDA Relay Talk
System Version2.
When any Events occurs Event file will automatically generate under Events node or Events
can be read from relay using ‘Read Events’
3.10.1 Read Events

To read new event file from the device right click on Events and select 'Read Events’.
Figure 41: Read IO Mask
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.10.2 To View Events

To view events data, double click on Event file. Event list with time, date and parameters will
display on screen. Following window will appear on screen.
Figure 42: View Events
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.11 History Faults

History Faults continuously recorded till the memory is available, when the memory will be
full, the oldest fault automatically get erased and the new fault will recorded on the same.
(Like First In First Out Logic)
Trip count, Tripping Timing, Fault Flags and Fault Value with Time and date will display in
history faults.
3.11.1 To read the History Faults from Device

To Read history Faults from device right click on History Faults then click on Read History
Faults. Following window will appear on screen.
History file will added under the History Faults node.
Figure 43: Read History faults
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.11.2 To view the History Faults file

To View the History Fault file double click on respective History Fault file.
Figure 44: View History Faults file
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.12 Alias
To edit DI/DO lables of specific Function number and Information number goto Alias
node.Double click on Alias node screen will open in the main document window.Double click
on record which needs to change. Following window will appear on screen.
Figure 45: Alias screen
Figure 46: Change Alias
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.13 Control
Select a device and goto Control node. Double click on Control node screen will open in the
main document window. Select Control and press Operate Control button.
Figure 47: Operate Control
3.14 Disturbance Record

Disturbance record continuously recorded till the memory is available, when the memory will
be full, the oldest record automatically gets erased and the new record will record on the
same. (Like First In First out Logic).
Disturbance record stores 12 samples per cycle. The same record can be shown in ASHIDA
Relay Talk System Version2 . The following window shows the recorded disturbance record.
3.14.1 Show the Disturbance Record from Device

To View Disturbance Record right click on ‘Disturbance Record’.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
Figure 48: Show Disturbance Record
3.14.2 Read Disturbance Record from Device

To extract disturbance record click “Read DR” from the grid. Following window will appear.
Figure 49: View Disturbance Record

After successful reading, extracted disturbance record file will appear in the Disturbance
record node.
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.14.3 View Disturbance Record file

To view the disturbance record file double click on the file. It will open the file in DR Analysis
and RELAY-DRV.
Figure 50: View disturbance record in RELAY-DRV
Figure 51: View disturbance record in RELAY-DRV
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.15 Measurements
The relay produces a variety of both directly measured values and calculated values. These
measurement values are updated on a per second basis and can view in the
“Measurements” columns on the relay screen or via ASHIDA Relay Talk System Version2 .
To view online measurements from device double click on Measurement node.
Measurements will be shown as follows:
Figure 52: View Measurements
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.16 Status
Status Screen is provided to view the online value of the status. To view status,right click on
Status node and select show status. Status list screen will appear with value and time.
Figure 53: View Status
3.17 Options
This section will give list of path and Settings associated with this Configurator. To view this
screen, click on Options under Tools.
3.17.1 System Folders Information

In this screen user will find Application system paths those are as follows:
 Application Folder Path
 Device Template Path
 RT System Path
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
Figure 54: System Folder Information
3.17.2 File Location Information

In this screen user will find Application file paths those are as follows:
 SASConfig.mdb File Path
 Log File Path
Figure 55: File Location Information
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
3.17.3 General Settings Information

In this screen user will find General Setting of Device Timeout those are as follows:
 Device connect Timeout(Sec)
 Device Read Timeout(Sec)
 Read DR Timeout(Sec)
Figure 56: General Settings Information
Rev No. : 00
ADR245B
Section 4
Protection Function and Logic

Function
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/PLF
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
Contents
4 PROTECTION FUNCTION & LOGIC FUNCTIONS 100
4.1 Overview 100
4.2 Application Data 101
4.4 Phase Over current Element (50/51/67P) 104
4.4.1 Non Directional Phase Over current (50/51) 104
4.4.2 Directional Phase Over current (67P) 105
4.5 Ground Over current Element (50N/51N/67N) 107
4.5.1 Non Directional Ground Over current (50/N/51N) 107
4.5.2 Directional Ground Over current (67N) 108
4.6 Residual Over current Element (50N/51N/67N) 110
4.6.1 Non Directional Residual Over current (50/N/51N) 110
4.6.2 Directional Residual Over current (67P) 111
4.7 Sequence Overcurrent (46) 112
4.8 IDMT Characteristics 112
4.9 Under/Over Voltage (27/59) 115
4.10 Residual over Voltage (59N) 118
4.11 Sequence Overvoltage 119
4.14 Breaker Failure Setting (50BF) 126
4.15 Reclosing 128
4.16 Broken Conductor (46BC/50BC) 129
4.17 Programmable Logic control 131
Rev No. : 01
ADR245B
4 PROTECTION FUNCTION & LOGIC FUNCTIONS
4.1 Overview
This section describes the ADR245B Feeder Management IED settings, including the
protection elements and basic functions, control I/O logic, as well as the settings associated
with the protection function.
Application data.
Describes the list of information that you will need to know about the protected equipment
before calculating the relay settings.
General Settings.
List of settings that configure the IED inputs to accurately measure and interpret the ac
current and optional voltage input signals.
Phase over current.

Describes all the Directional, Non Directional and voltage controlled over current settings and
logic needed for protection for the Phase over current fault
Ground over current.

Describes all the Directional and Non Directional externally measured Ground over current
settings and logic needed for protection for the Phase to Ground fault.
Residual Over current.

Describes all the Directional and Non Directional internally derived Ground over current
settings and logic needed for protection for the Ground over current Protection.
Sequence overcurrent.
Describes all the Sequence Over current settings and logic needed for protection for the
Phase reversal or broken conductor fault.
Under/Over Voltage.
Describes all the Under and Over voltage settings and logic needed for protection for the
under and over voltage fault.
Residual Overvoltage.
Describes the internally derived zero sequence voltage settings and logic needed for
protection for the Residual Over voltage Protection function.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 100 of 335
ADR245B
Sequence Overvoltage.
Describes all the Negative Phase Sequence Over voltage settings and logic needed for
protection during high resistive faults and unbalance loading condition
VT Supervision.
Describes all the Voltage Transformer Supervision settings and logic needed for block the
protection and to generate the alarm for VT Fuse failure
CT Supervision.
Describes all the Current Transformer Supervision settings and logic needed for block the
protection and to generate the alarm for VT Fuse failure
Breaker Failure Setting.

Describes all the Breaker Failure settings and logic needed for Breaker failure on internal
protection trip or external BF initiation.
Reclosing.
Describes all the Auto reclosing IED settings and logic needed for automatic reclosing for the
temporary fault.
Broken Conductor.
Describes all the Broken Conductor IED settings and logic needed for Broken Conductor
built by Program logic control
Programmable Logic control.

Describes programmable and logic equation that the user can build their own logic for
various application.
4.2 Application Data

It is required to have the field data which is used to calculate the parameter settings which
has to be set in the IED. Hence the following inputs are required to calculate the parameter
settings in the relay.
• Highest expected load current.
• Current transformer primary and secondary ratings and Connections
• Voltage transformer ratios and connections
• System nominal frequency
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 101 of 335
ADR245B
• Expected fault current magnitudes for ground and three-phase Faults
4.3 General Settings

Communication setting
The Communication settings of ADR245B IED are listed the below table which is necessary
for the communication between the IED and Personal computer.
Table 1. The Communication settings
SL. NO Setting Parameters Setting ranges

1. Unit ID 0001 - 0250
2. Baud Rate 1200/2400/9600/19200/38400/57600
3. Com Port RS232/RS485
4. Set Parity None
The above settings are used to establish the proper communication between the IED and
Relay Talk V2 software from the Computer. The above settings should be set the same in
configuration as well in the IED for the successful communication.
CT, PT and Frequency Settings

The Current and potential transformer setting is required to set for perfect scaling of voltage
and current measurement. The primary and secondary values of voltage and current settings
are set in the IED and system nominal frequency as given below table.
Table 2. The frequency, CT and PT settings.
SL.NO Setting Parameters Setting ranges

1. Frequency 50Hz/60Hz
2. Ph CT Secondary 1A/5A
3. Ph CT Primary 10A to 5000 A
4. EF CT Secondary 1A/5A
5. EF CT Primary 10A to 5000 A
6. VT Primary 1 to 500 kV in step 0.1kV L-l
7. VT Secondary 63.5 V (Ln)
The above settings are have to be set based on the Electrical power system parameters to
establish the proper measurement of voltage and current in the IED.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 102 of 335
ADR245B
Local Control Setting

A Local Control parameter setting is provided with OFF or ON option. This is used to operate
the relay locally by pressing the Test button from the HMI when it is enabled.
Post Trigger Setting

A Post Trigger setting is provided with setting range of 5 % to 95%. This is used to set the
post fault delay in the Disturbance Recorder.
Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS)

The trip circuit supervision is use to monitor healthiness of circuit breaker. The trip circuit
extends beyond the relay enclosure and passes through more components, such as fuse,
wires, relay contacts, auxiliary switch contact and so on. The failure of any one of component
result bypassing the protection. The relay is provide with special trip circuit supervision
function which continuously monitor continuity of trip circuit and generate ALARM to take
appropriate action.
The fifure1 represents the logic implementation of Trip Circuit Supervision , It monitor
continuity of trip circuit through either normally open (NO) or normally close (NC) contact of
CB connected to opto isolator digital input assigned to TCS. If any discontinuity is observed,
then the relay generates TCS Alarm after a time delay An Alarm message is displayed on
LCD display and Event is stored in the Event Record.
TCS = ON
CB 52A
& &
CB 52B
TCS
OR HEALTHY
CB 52A TCS
DELAY
FAIL
& &
CB 52B
Figure 1: Logic Diagram for Trip Circuit Supervision
When the CB is closed, supervision current passes through the opto-input, into the trip coil
via 52A. When the CB is open, supervision current flows through the opto-input and into the
trip coil via the 52b auxiliary contact. This means that TCS (Trip Coil healthy) signal is high
when the 52A or 52B signal is available. Otherwise IED Generates TCS Fail signal which is
used to block the protection function.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 103 of 335
ADR245B
4.4 Phase Over current Element (50/51/67P)

4.4.1 Non Directional Phase Over current (50/51)
Non Directional Phase Over-current function operate for a set value of current with time
delay (IDMT/DT) and operate for any given direction of current.
There are four stages for Phase over current Protections. The figure3 represents the logic
diagram of the phase over current protection function.
IP>n
-
A Phase Current +
IDMT/ IP>n A Trip
& DT
IP>n Enable =
NDir IP>n A Pkp
Figure 2: Logic Diagram for the Non Directional phase over current
The same logic will be applicable for B and C phase over current function.
Where n=1, 2, 3, 4 stages of Over Current.
The IP>n Enable parameter can be set as OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir/VC. The above logic diagram
work for non directional phase over current protection function if IP>n Enable parameter
selected as NDir (Non Directional)
The Phase over Current logic checks the phase currents are exceeds the pickup value
(IP>n) and calculated operating time based on the curve selected in the IP>n Curve setting
and IP>n TMS or tIP>n C6 DT parameter settings. After satisfied all the above condition the
IED generates the phase over current trip.
Voltage Controlled over current Trip (VC)

The ADR245B is also provided with addition feature of voltage controlled over current
protection function. The logic is explained below.
The below logic diagram work for voltage controlled non directional phase over current
protection function if IP>n Enable parameter selected as VC (Voltage over current trip) and
also Under voltage function must be enabled
The voltage controlled phase over current logic checks the phase currents are exceeds the
pickup value (IP>n) and also checks any of the phase voltage is reduces the under voltage
pickup setting. then the relay generate over current trip signal after the set time delay.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 104 of 335
ADR245B
IP>n
-
A Phase Current +
IDMT/ IP>n A Trip
IP>n Enable = & DT
NDir
IP>n A Pkp
V<P
Figure 3: Logic Diagram for voltage controlled phase over current
4.4.2 Directional Phase Over current (67P)
Figure 4: Directional for phase & Ground Faults.

Directional element of relay will be deciding faults in forward/reverse direction with the help
of voltage & current flows on over head transmission line / underground cable during faults.
RCA/MTA setting range of relay will provide flexibility to users to set directional angles based
on power system parameters. Operating time of directional element shall be settable
instantaneous or with definite & inverse time delay.
Directional element of relay will be deciding faults in forward/reverse direction by voltage &
current flows on over head transmission line / underground cable during faults. RCA/MTA
setting range of relay will provide flexibility to users to set directional angles based on power
system parameters. Operating time of directional element shall be settable instantaneous or
with definite & inverse time delay.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 105 of 335
ADR245B
Figure 5: Direction logic for Phase Over Current.

The below logic diagram work for forward or reverse Directional phase over current
protection function when IP>n Enable parameter selected as +Dir/-Dir (Forward or Reverse
directional)
The Directional Phase over Current logic checks the phase currents are exceeds the pickup
value (IP>n) and determines fault direction based on voltage polarizing quantity and phase
current and the operating time will be calculated based on the curve selected in the IP>n
Curve setting and IP>n TMS or tIP>n C6 DT parameter settings. After satisfied all the above
condition the IED generates forward or reverse phase over current trip.
The figure 5 represents the logic diagram of the directional phase over current protection
function.
IP>n
- A>Pkp
IA Phase Current +
& IDMT/DT A>Trip
IP>n Enable =
+Dir
&
Polarized Voltage
VBC
Figure 6: Logic Diagram for the Forward Directional phase over current
The same logic will be applicable for B Phase and C Phase Directional over current
protection function
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 106 of 335
ADR245B
IP>n
- A>Pkp
IA Phase Current +
& IDMT/DT A>Trip
IP>n Enable =
-Dir
&
Polarized Voltage
VBC
Figure 7: Logic Diagram for the Reverse Directional phase over current
The same logic will be applicable for B Phase and C Phase Directional over current
protection function
4.5 Ground Over current Element (50N/51N/67N)

4.5.1 Non Directional Ground Over current (50/N/51N)
Non Directional ground Over-current function operate for a set value of current with time
There are four stages for Ground over current Protections. The following diagram explains
about the Ground over current protection function.
IE>n
-
IN Ground Current +
IDMT/ IE>n Trip
&
DT
IEn Enable =
NDir IE>n Pickup
Figure 8: Logic Diagram for the Non Directional Ground over current
Where n=1, 2, 3, 4 stages of Over Current.

The IE>n Enable parameter can be set as OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir. the above logic diagram work
for non directional Ground over current protection function if IE>n Enable parameter selected
as NDir (Non Directional)
The Ground over Current logic checks the Measured Ground currents are exceeds the
pickup value (IE>n) and calculating the operating time based on the curve selected in the
IE>n Curve setting and IE>n TMS or tIE>n C6 DT parameter settings. After satisfied all the
above condition the IED generates the Ground over current trip.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 107 of 335
ADR245B
4.5.2 Directional Ground Over current (67N)
Figure 9: Externally measured ground over current neutral CT

ADR245B relay provides three stages of externally ground over current protection. ADR245B
relay measures ground fault current through neutral CT input.
Directional element of relay will be deciding faults in forward/reverse direction by Zero
sequence voltage & fault current. Operating time of directional element shall be settable
instantaneous or with definite & inverse time delay.
Figure 10: Directional discrimination for phase to ground fault
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 108 of 335
ADR245B
The logic diagram fig5 is work for forward or reverse directional Ground over current
protection function when IP>n Enable parameter is selected as +Dir/-Dir (Forward or
Reverse directional)
The Directional Ground over Current logic checks Measured Ground current are exceeds the
pickup value (IP>n) and determines fault direction based on zero sequence voltage quantity
and Ground Current and the operating time will be calculated based on the curve selected in
the IP>n Curve setting and IP>n TMS or tIP>n C6 DT parameter settings. After satisfied all
the above condition the IED generates forward or reverse ground over current trip.
The below logic diagram explains the directional ground over current protection function.
IE>n
-
IN Ground Current + &
IEn Enable =
IDMT/
+Dir Trip
Comparator DT
Pickup
Zero Sequence
Voltage (3V0)
Figure 11: Logic Diagram for the Forward Directional Ground over current
IE>n
-
IN Ground Current + &
IEn Enable = -Dir IDMT/

Trip
Comparator DT
Pickup
Zero Sequence
Voltage (3V0)
Figure 12: Logic Diagram for the Reverse Directional Ground over current
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 109 of 335
ADR245B
4.6 Residual Over current Element (50N/51N/67N)
Figure 13: Residual over current from three phases (Derived Zero sequence current)
ADR245B relay provides three stages of externally ground over current protection. ADR245B
relay measures ground fault current through neutral CT input. Externally ground CT input can
also apply for high impedance restricted earth fault protection or sensitive ground fault
protection through CBCT.
4.6.1 Non Directional Residual Over current (50/N/51N)

Non directional residual over-current function operate for a set value of current with time
There are four stages for Residual over current Protections. The following diagram explains
about the Residual over current protection function.
3I0>n
3I0 Residual
-
+ IDMT/ Trip
Current &
DT
3I0 Enable = NDir
Pickup
Figure 14 : Logic Diagram for the Non Directional Residual over current
Where n=1, 2, 3, stages of Residual Over Current.

The 3I0>n Enable parameter can be set as OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir.the above logic diagram work
for non directional Ground over current protection function if 3I0>n Enable parameter
selected as NDir (Non Directional)
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 110 of 335
ADR245B
The Residual over Current logic checks the Derived Ground currents are exceeds the pickup
value (3I0>n) and calculating the operating time based on the curve selected in the 3I0>n
Curve setting and 3I0>n TMS or t3I0>n C6 DT parameter settings. After satisfied all the
above condition the IED generates the Residual over current trip.
4.6.2 Directional Residual Over current (67P)

The logic diagram fig5 is work for forward or reverse direction Residual over current
protection function when 3I0>n Enable parameter is selected as +Dir/-Dir (Forward or
Reverse direction)
The Directional Residual over Current logic checks Derived Ground current is exceeds the
pickup value (3I0>n) and determines fault direction based on zero sequence voltage
quantity and Ground Current and the operating time will be calculated based on the curve
selected in the 3I0>n Curve setting and 3I0>n TMS or t3I0>n C6 DT parameter settings.
After satisfied all the above condition the IED generates forward or reverse Residual over
current trip.
The below logic diagram explains the directional ground over current protection function.
3I0>n
3I0 Residual
-
+
Current &
IDMT/
Trip
3Io Enable = +Dir Comparator DT
Pickup
Zero Sequence
Voltage (3V0)
Figure 15: Logic Diagram for the Forward Directional phase over current
The 3I0 is calculated as shown below

3I0 = IA+IB+IC
3V0 =VA+VB+VC
3I0>n
3I0 Residual
-
+
Current &
IDMT/
Trip
3Io Enable = -Dir DT
Comparator
Pickup
Zero Sequence
Voltage (3V0)
Figure 16: Logic Diagram for the Reverse Directional phase over current
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 111 of 335
ADR245B
4.7 Sequence Overcurrent (46)
Seq.I>1
I2 Negative
-
+ IDMT/
Sequence Current & Trip Seq.I>1
DT
Seq.I>1 = -Seq
Seq.I>1 P
Figure 17: Logic Diagram for the Negative sequence over current
The Negative sequence current is calculate from the three phase current is shown below
2 o
Negative sequence current I2 = (IA+a IB+aIC)/3 Where a = 1 L120 .
The logic diagram fig.9 is work for Negative phase sequence over current protection function
when Seq.I>1 Enable parameter is selected as “-Seq “
The Negative phase sequence over Current logic calculate Negative phase sequence
current and checks whether it is exceeds the pickup value (Seq.I>1) and calculate the
operating time based on the curve selected in the Seq.I>1 Curve and Seq.I>1 TMS or
Seq.I>1 C6 DT parameter settings. After satisfied all the above condition the IED generates
Negative Phase over current trip.
The second stage of Negative sequence current (Seq.I>n >2) is also working like first stage.
But it is only provided with Definite Time Characteristics. Similarly Positive sequence current
logic also working like Negative sequence current whereas the logic follows the Positive
sequence current.
4.8 IDMT Characteristics

ADR245B relay provides inverse time over current characteristic for phase over current,
ground over current and Negative phase over elements. Each stage of phase and ground
over current elements are independently settable with inverse time or definite time
characteristic. The following tripping characteristics are available
• IEC Normal Inverse Curve (C1) for 3s
• IEC Normal Inverse Curve (C2) for 1.3s
• IEC Very Inverse Curve (C3)
• IEC Extremely Inverse Curve (C4)
• Long time Inverse Curve (C5)
• Definite time Over current (C6)
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 112 of 335
ADR245B
All four stages of over current and three stages of earth fault as well as single stage of
negative sequence O/C function are programmable as per IDMT characteristic based on IEC
standards. The inverse time delay is calculated with the following mathematical formula:
K * a
t= b
I
1
Iref
Curve Type Description A b

C1 Standard Inverse_1 0.14 0.02
C2 Standard Inverse_2 0.06 0.02
C3 Very Inverse 13.5 1
C4 Extremely inverse 80 2
C5 Long Time Inverse 120 1
C6 Define Time - -
The separate output contact allows to use each stage for independent function such as stage
1 can be used for ALARM stage 2 for tripping or both can be use for tripping independent
CB. Each stage can enable or disable depend upon application.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 113 of 335
ADR245B
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 114 of 335
ADR245B
4.9 Under/Over Voltage (27/59)
Figure 18: Circuit Diagram for under and Over Voltage protection
Overvoltage and under voltage conditions are generally related to loss of load conditions or
Over load condition, whereby the supply voltage increases or decreases in magnitude. If the
regulating equipment is unsuccessful in restoring healthy system voltage, Then the under
voltage or overvoltage element is required to trip the circuit breaker for the stable operation
of Electrical power system.
ADR245B relay provides independent phase over and under voltage protections with definite
time delay setting. Protection functions can be programmed for alarm signal or trip signal
through programmable logic.
The logic diagram fig.17 is work for Under voltage protection function when V< parameter is
selected as ON (OFF/ON/AND/+SEQ).Then Under voltage protection logic checks whether
any of phase the voltage goes below the Threshold value and the VT Supervision logic is not
high and the set time delay expired then the IED generates Under Voltage trip
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 115 of 335
ADR245B
V<
VA Phase
-
+
Voltage
& DT Trip V<A
V< = ON
V<A P
VTS
Figure 19: Logic Diagram for the Under Voltage Function (ON Selection)
The same logic will applicable for the other B Phase and C Phase under voltage function.
The logic diagram fig.17 is work for under voltage protection function when V< parameter is
selected as AND (OFF/ON/AND/+SEQ). Then Under voltage protection logic checks whether
all the phase the voltage goes below the Threshold value and the VT Supervision logic is not
high and the set time delay expired then the IED generates Under Voltage trip
V<
VA Phase
-
+
Voltage
&
VB Phase
- & DT Trip V< x
+
Voltage
-
VC Phase + V< x P
Voltage
V< = AND
Note x = A,B,C
VTS
Figure 20: Logic Diagram for the Under Voltage Function (AND Selection)
The logic diagram fig.17 is work for Under voltage protection function when V< parameter is
selected as +SEQ(OFF/ON/AND/+SEQ).. Then Under voltage protection logic checks
whether positive sequence voltage goes below the Threshold value and the VT Supervision
logic is not high and the set time delay expired then the IED generates Under Voltage trip
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 116 of 335
ADR245B
V<
Positive Sequence
-
+
Voltage & DT Trip V< x
V< = +SEQ
V< x P
VTS
Note x = A,B,C
Figure 21: Logic Diagram for the Under Voltage Function (+SEQ Selection)
The logic diagram fig.18 is work for over voltage protection function when Over Voltage
parameter is selected as ON (OFF/ON/AND).
The Over voltage protection logic checks whether any of the phase voltage goes above the
Threshold value (V>) and once the set time delay (tV>) expired then the IED generates over
voltage trip.
V>
VA Phase
-
+
Voltage
& DT Trip V>A
V> = ON
V>A P
VTS
Figure 22: Logic Diagram for the Over Voltage Function (ON Selection)
The same logic will be applicable for B Phase and C Phase Over Voltage function.
The logic diagram fig.19 is work for over voltage protection function when Over Voltage
parameter is selected as AND (OFF/ON/AND).
The Over voltage protection logic checks whether all the phase voltage must goes above the
Threshold value (V>) and once the set time delay (tV>) expired then the IED generates over
voltage trip.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 117 of 335
ADR245B
V>
VA Phase
-
+
Voltage
&
VB Phase
- & DT Trip V> x
+
Voltage
-
VC Phase + V> x P
Voltage
V> = AND
Note x = A,B,C
VTS
Figure 23: Logic Diagram for the Over Voltage Function (AND Selection)
4.10 Residual over Voltage (59N)

The ADR245B relay provides zero sequence / residual over and voltage protection with
definite time delay setting. Protection can be achieved by externally measured residual
voltage through open delta VT or the zero sequence voltage internally calculated from three
phases as circuit diagram shown below.
Figure 24: Circuit Diagram for Residual Voltage (3V0)

The zero sequence voltage is generated when there is unbalance in voltage or any high
resistive fault. In the above circuit diagram, it shows the zero sequence voltage can be
derived when PT secondary terminals is connected in star type but the IED can measures
the zero sequence voltage directly when the PT secondary is connected in Delta type.
The below logic diagram explains about the residual overvoltage protection.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 118 of 335
ADR245B
VN>
-
VN Derived/ +
Measured
& tVN> Trip VN
Residual O/V =
Measured
VN< P
VTS
Figure 25:Logic Diagram for the Residual Over Voltage Function

The Directional Residual Over voltage protection logic checks whether all the phase voltage
must goes above the Threshold value (VN>) and once the set time delay (tVN>) expired then
the IED generates Residual over voltage trip
4.11 Sequence Overvoltage
Seq.V>1
Negative
-
+
sequence voltage
& tV2> Trip V2
Seq.V>1 = -Seq
V2>P
VTS
Figure 26: Logic Diagram for the Negative phase sequence over Voltage
The Negative sequence current is calculate from the three phase voltage is shown below
2 o
Negative sequence voltage V2 = (VA+a VB+aVC)/3 Where a = 1 L120 .
The logic diagram is work for Negative phase sequence over voltage protection function
when Seq.V>1 Enable parameter is selected as -Seq (OFF/-Seq/+Seq).
The Negative phase sequence over voltage logic calculate Negative phase sequence
voltage and checks whether it is exceeds the pickup value (SeqV>1) and the operating time
based on the set value in the tSeqV>1 parameter setting. After satisfied all the above
condition the IED generates Negative Phase over Voltage trip.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 119 of 335
ADR245B
Seq.V>1
Negative
-
+
sequence voltage
& tV2> Trip V1
Seq.V>1 = +Seq
V1>P
VTS
Figure 27: Logic Diagram for the Positive phase sequence over Voltage
The Positive sequence current is calculate from the three phase voltage is shown below
2 o
Positive sequence voltage V2 = (VA+aVB+ a VC)/3 Where a = 1 L120 .
The logic diagram is work for Positive phase sequence over voltage protection function when
Seq.V>1 Enable parameter is selected as +Seq (OFF/-Seq/+Seq).
The Positive phase sequence over voltage logic calculate Positive phase sequence voltage
and checks whether it is exceeds the pickup value (SeqV>1) and the operating time based
on the set value in the tSeqV>1 parameter setting. After satisfied all the above condition the
IED generates Positive Phase Sequence over Voltage trip.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 120 of 335
ADR245B
4.12 VT Supervision
Figure 28: Circuit Diagram for VT Supervision function

The ADR245 IED has allowed the use of sophisticated algorithms based on symmetrical
Components to detect the loss of VT signal. When a situation of loss of one or more of the
VT signals Occurs, the following conditions develop:
• There will be a drop in the positive sequence voltage accompanied by an increase in

the negative sequence voltage magnitude. The magnitude of this drop will depend
upon the number of phases impacted by a fuse failure.
• In case of a loss of VT signal and contrary to a fault condition, there should not be
any change in the current’s magnitudes and phases. Therefore, the negative and zero
sequence currents should remain below a small tolerance value. A fault condition can
be distinguished from a loss of VT signal by monitoring the changes in the positive
and negative current levels. In case of a loss of VT signals, these changes should
remain below a small tolerance level.
All the above conditions can be incorporated into a complex logic scheme to determine if
indeed a there has been a condition of loss of VT signal or a fault. When “VTS” parameter
setting is selected as “Int” (internal) then Figure 23 represents the logic implementation of a
voltage transformer fuse failure based on symmetrical components.
• the positive sequence voltage is below a voltage set-value “V1” parameter setting,
• the negative sequence voltage is above a voltage set-value “V2” parameter setting,
• there exists a small value of current such that the positive sequence current I1 is
above a small
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 121 of 335
ADR245B
• set-value “I1” parameter setting and the negative and zero sequence currents I2 do
not exceed a small set value “I2” parameter setting,
Then a fuse failure condition will pick up to one and remain in that state thanks to the latch
effect. the IED generate the VTS Alarm and Block the relevant protection. As soon as the
positive sequence voltage returns to a value greater than the set value “V1” parameter
setting and the negative sequence voltage disappears, the fuse failure condition returns to a
zero state.
VTS = Int
V1 > Set Value
&
V2 > Set Value
&
Timer VTS ALARM
I1 > Set Value VTS Block
I2 < Set Value &
I0 < Set Value
&
VTS UnBlock
Figure 29: Logic Diagram of VTS Function (on Internal selection)
There are other cases considered in the ADR245 IED for VT Supervision function in case of
VT with MCB,
When “VTS” parameter setting is selected as “Ext” (External) then the logic diagram in figure
24 represents logic implementation of the VT Supervision function for VT with MCB based on
symmetrical components and MCB Status.
If The MCB is normally open coil then the “EXT VTS Ip” setting should be selected as Low,
But if it is normally closed coil then “EXT VTS Ip” should be selected as High.(it is not
applicable for VTS internal Logic)
• The positive sequence voltage is below a voltage set-value “V1” parameter setting,
• The auxiliary status assigned to the MCB is high.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 122 of 335
ADR245B
• there exists a small value of current such that the positive sequence current I1 is
above a small
• set-value “I1” parameter setting and the negative and zero sequence currents I2 do
not exceed a small set value “I2” parameter setting,
Then a fuse failure condition will pick up to one and remain in that state thanks to the latch
effect. the IED generate the VTS Alarm and Block the relevant protection. As soon as the
positive sequence voltage returns to a value greater than the set value “V1” parameter
setting and the auxiliary status assigned to the MCB is become low, the fuse failure condition
returns to a zero state.
VTS = Ext
MCB Contact
Status
&
V1 < Set Value
&
Timer VTS ALARM
I1 > Set Value VTS Block
I2 < Set Value &
I0 < Set Value
&
VTS UnBlock
Figure 30: Logic Diagram of VTS Function for MCB (External selection)
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 123 of 335
ADR245B
4.13 CT Supervision
Figure 31: Circuit Diagram for CT Supervision
ADR245B relay provides CT supervision function to detecting a loss of phase current due to
the failure of ct secondary wiring.
If the power system currents are healthy, negligible negative & zero sequence voltage could
be derived. If, however, one or more of the AC current inputs are missing, a negative & zero
sequence currents would be derived, even if the actual power system phase currents are
healthy. CTS works by using these criteria; that is by detecting a ratio of derived negative to
positive sequence currents & ratio of derived zero
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 124 of 335
ADR245B
CTS = Enabled
37I < Set Value
-
Ix Phase Current +
I2/I1 > Set Value
- &
I2/I1 ratio +
I0/I1 > Set Value
-
I0/I1 ratio +
&
Timer CTS ALARM
V1 > Set Value
V1- Positive
-
+
sequence Voltage
V2 < Set Value
V2- Negative
- &
+
sequence Voltage
V0< Set Value
V0- Zero sequence

-
+
Voltage
Figure 32: Logic Diagram for CTS Function

The ADR245 IED has allowed the use of sophisticated algorithms based on symmetrical
Components to detect the loss of CT signal. When a situation of loss of one or more of the
CT signals Occurs, the following conditions develop:
• There will be a drop in the phase current accompanied by an increase in ratio of the
negative sequence current and the positive sequence current also by an increase in
ratio of the Zero sequence current and the positive sequence current. The magnitude
of this drop will depend upon the number of phases impacted by a CT fuse failure.
• In case of a loss of CT signal and contrary to a fault condition, there should not be
any change in the Voltage magnitudes and phases. Therefore, the negative and zero
sequence voltage should remain below a small tolerance value. A fault condition can
be distinguished from a loss of CT signal by monitoring the changes in the positive ,
negative and Zero sequence Voltage levels. In case of a loss of CT signals, these
changes should remain below a small tolerance level.
All the above conditions can be incorporated into a complex logic scheme to determine if
indeed a there has been a condition of loss of CT signal or a fault. When “CTS” parameter
setting is selected as “Enabled” then Figure 25 represents the logic implementation of a
current transformer fuse failure based on symmetrical components.
• The phase current is below a current set-value “I1” parameter setting,
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 125 of 335
ADR245B
• The ratio of negative sequence and positive sequence voltage is above a ratio set-
value “I2/I1” parameter setting,
• The ratio of zero sequence and positive sequence current is above a ratio set-value
“I0/I1” parameter setting,
• There exists a small value of voltage such that the any phase voltage is above a small
set-value “V1” parameter setting and the negative and zero sequence currents o not
exceed a small set value “V2” and “V0” parameter setting,
Then a CT fuse failure condition will pick up to one and remain in that state thanks to the
latch effect. The IED generate the CTS Alarm and Block the relevant protection. As soon as
the phase current returns to a value greater than the set value “I1” parameter setting and the
ratio of negative ( and Zero sequence voltage) sequence and positive sequence voltage
disappears, the CTS fuse failure condition returns to a zero state.
4.14 Breaker Failure Setting (50BF)

If the Circuit Breaker fails to operate within the settable time following the protection trip then
relay Generates a circuit breaker failure trip signal. Following the inception of a fault one or
more main protection devices will operate. Operation of the circuit breaker is essential to
isolate the fault, and prevent damage or further damage to the power system.
For transmission and sub-transmission systems, slow fault clearance can also threaten
system stability. It is therefore common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection
[50BF], which monitors that the circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable time. If the
fault current has not been interrupted following a set time delay from circuit breaker trip
initiation, breaker failure protection (CBF) will operate. CBF operation can be use to operate
back-trip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the fault is isolated correctly.
50BF = Int
50 BF Delay
Any Trip & 50 BF

&
If I in Phase is less
than 50BF_I
&
52(B)
CB Open
Figure 33: Logic Diagram for Internal Breaker Failure Function
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 126 of 335
ADR245B
The logic Diagram of Figure.27 is explain about the Breaker failure on protection trip in the
IED , the Breaker failure will be initiated on protection trip or External Breaker Fail initiation
through the assigned status.
Once the protection trip on fault, then the breaker must open within the time, delay setting
“50 BF Delay time”, otherwise after the time delay, IED issue Breaker Failure (50BF) trip. the
50 BF will reset once the current goes less than the set value and CB Open (52B) status is
high.
50BF = Ext
CBF Timer
50BF Ext & 50 BF

&
If I in Phase is less
than 50BF_I<
&
52(B)
CB Open
Figure 34: Logic Diagram for External Breaker Failure
Normally after tripping current should become Zero within 100 – 200ms time depend upon
type of fault and breaker mechanism. After Fault ADR245B trigger internal timer (settable
from 0.1s to 1.0s) if fault is not cleared during this time then relay declare as Breaker fail
(LBB function) and change another contacts. These contacts is marked as Breaker Fail can
be used to TRIP back up breaker or can be used to generate ALARM signal.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 127 of 335
ADR245B
4.15 Reclosing
Fault
52A
td tr
Reclose
Lockout
time
Figure 35: Logic Diagram for reclosing logic
The ADR245B is provided with 4 shot Auto recloser function. There are 4 timer for auto
recloser 1) Dead Time for shot 1 (DT1) 2) Dead Time for shot 2 (DT2) 3) Dead Time for shot
3 (DT3) 4) Dead Time for shot 4 (DT4) and 5) Reclaim Time (RT). After clearing of fault
ADR245B trigger dead Time 1 i.e DT1. After the time delay Relay provide reclose command
and start reclaim timer RT. If second fault occur during RT relay trigger Dead Time 2 i.e DT2.
If third fault occur during RT relay trigger Dead Time 3 i.e DT3, If Fourth fault occur during
RT relay trigger Dead Time 4 i.e DT4 and after time delay it again provide reclose command
and retrigger RT. If fifth fault occur during RT Relay generate Lock-Out alarm and block
further reclose. The Lock-Out condition can be reset locally as well remotely by SCADA
through communication digital status input.
Some of features of Auto recloser
• If CB is already in open condition relay will not trigger Auto recloser sequences. This
is required for block condition.
• Auto recloser can be bypass if fault current is more than set limit
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 128 of 335
ADR245B
4.16 Broken Conductor (46BC/50BC)
Figure 36: Circuit Diagram for Broken conductor application

ADR245B equipped with broken conductor detection protection. Broken conductor condition
can be detected by ratio of Negative sequence current to Positive sequence current (I2/I1).
Protection provides higher sensitivity on High resistive fault.
Most of the faults that affect a power system are phase to phase and the phase to earth fault.
These faults are shunt faults, such faults lead the current to increase appreciably and
therefore they can easily be detected in most applications.
Open circuit faults (or Series faults) are a different type of faults that can happen in electrical
networks. These faults can be caused by broken conductors, blown fuses or misoperation of
a pole of a circuit-breaker. Open circuit faults will not lead to an increase in phase current
and therefore they cannot be easily detected by common over current relays. However, this
type of faults produces an unbalance that creates negative phase sequence current, which
can be detectd.
Note: Broken conductor is activated if current of I1 is greater than 1% and I2 is greater than 5%.
Broken conductor based on 46BC (I2/I1(46BC))

The ADR245B relays incorporated a Brocken conductor (46BC) protection element, The
Brocken conductor Logic Diagram 8 explains for Brocken conductor 46BC on “ON”
Selection. Which checks the ratio of negative to positive phase sequence current (I2/I1)
exceeds the set value If this condition is satisfied, After elapsed set delay, then relay will
generate I2/I1 Trip or BC Alarm as per the associated settings.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 129 of 335
ADR245B
I2/I1 = ON
&
I2/I1 >n Timer Trip I2/I1>n
-
I2/I1 ratio +
I2/I1>n P
Figure 37: Logic Diagram for Brocken conductor 46BC (ON Selection)
The Logic Diagram 8 explains for Brocken conductor 46BC on “&I2” Selection. Which checks
the ratio of the negative to positive phase sequence current (I2/I1) exceeds the set value and
the Negative phase sequence current (I2) exceed the set value. If the both condition is
satisfied, After elapsed set delay, then relay will generate BC Trip or BC Alarm as per the
associated settings.
I2/I1 = ON
&
-
I2/I1 ratio +
I2/I1>n P
I2>n P,Negative
Seq.I Pickup
Figure 38: Logic Diagram for Brocken conductor 46BC (&I2 Selection)
The Logic Diagram 9 explains for Brocken conductor 46BC on “&50BC” Selection. Which
checks the ratio of the negative to positive phase sequence current (I2/I1) exceeds the set
value and the ratio of the Zero to positive phase sequence current (I0/I1) exceeds the set
value If the both condition is satisfied, After elapsed set delay, then relay will generate
Broken Conductor Trip
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 130 of 335
ADR245B
I2/I1 = ON
&
-
I2/I1 ratio +
I2/I1>n P
I0/I1>1 P
Figure 39: Logic Diagram for Brocken conductor 46BC (&50BC Selection)
Broken conductor based on 50BC(I0/I1(50BC))

The Logic Diagram 10 explains for Brocken conductor 50BC on “ON” Selection. Which
checks the ratio of the Zero to positive phase sequence current (I2/I1) exceeds the set value
If this condition is satisfied, After elapsed set delay, then relay will generate Broken
Conductor Trip
I0/I1 = ON
&
-
I0/I1 ratio +
I0/I1>n P
Figure 40: Logic Diagram for Brocken conductor 50BC (I0/I1)
4.17 Programmable Logic control

The Basic version of ADR245B relay provides total 8 nos. of target & programmable LEDs
with dual colours indication. The extended version of ADR245B relay provides total 16 nos.
of target and programmable LEDs with dual colours indication. The LEDs can be
programmed either through HMI or through PC software (RTV2 software).
The ADR245B also provides the programmable pushbuttons for circuit breaker close and
open from HMI of relay. Pushbuttons can be programmed through HMI or through RTV2
software.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 131 of 335
ADR245B
The ADR245B relay integrates complete logic equations to allow Customization of the
product based on customer application. User can program 4 AND Logic equations with pick
up and reset timer at the output. Independent Boolean equations can be used and every
result of equation can be time delayed and assigned to any output relays and LEDs.
Any protection functions, Control Operations and opto I/Ps are used as inputs to the AND
logic equations and result of equation can be time delayed and assigned to any output relays
and LEDs.
The following example explain AND logic equation.
Protection
Function
Control Pickup /
Operation Assigned Relay
AND Gate Reset
Contact / LED
Timer
Opto I/P
Figure 41: AND Equation Logic
An example logic implementation using Boolean Equation is shown below:
Opto I/P 1 Pickup /

Assigned Relay
AND Gate Reset
Contact / LED
Timer
TCS Alarm
Figure 42: AND Equation Logic Example
In the above example of logic implementation, there are two inputs to the AND equations,
one is SF6 Gas low signal which is externally wired to Opto I/P 1 of relay and other input is
TCS Alarm which is internally generated signal. When both the input signals are active. Then
the result of AND equation will be active. This output can be used to block all protection
functions through an external wiring.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 132 of 335
ADR245B
Section 5
Metering Section
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/MS
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 134 of 335
ADR245B
Contents
5 MEASUREMENT SHEET 136
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 135 of 335
ADR245B
5 MEASUREMENT SHEET
5.1 Measurement 1
Measurement 1 displays the Voltage, Current and symmetrical components based on the
power system network.
Parameter Unit Description
IA MAG=0000.00A A Primary current in phase A
IB MAG=0000.00A A Primary current in phase B
IC MAG=0000.00A A Primary current in phase C
IN MAG=0000.00A A Primary current in Neutral CT
Ia MAG=0000.000A A Secondary current in phase A
Ib MAG=0000.000A A Secondary current in phase B
Ic MAG=0000.000A A Secondary current in phase C
In MAG=0000.000A A Secondary current in Neutral CT
I1 MAG=0000.000A A Positive sequence current
I2 MAG=0000.000A A Negative sequence current
I0 MAG=0000.000A A Zero sequence current
VAN MAG =000.00 kV V Primary Voltage in phase A
VBN MAG =000.00 kV V Primary Voltage in phase B
VCN MAG =000.00 kV V Primary Voltage in phase C
VAB MAG =000.00 kV V Primary Voltage in phase AB
VBC MAG =000.00 kV V Primary Voltage in phase BC
VCA MAG =000.00 kV V Primary Voltage in phase CA
Van MAG =000.000 V V Secondary Voltage in phase A
Vbn MAG =000.000 V V Secondary Voltage in phase B
Vcn MAG =000.000 V V Secondary Voltage in phase C
Vab MAG =000.000 V V Secondary Voltage in phase AB
Vbc MAG =000.000 V V Secondary Voltage in phase BC
Vca MAG =000.000 V V Secondary Voltage in phase CA
V1 MAG =000.000 V V Positive sequence Voltage
V2 MAG =000.000 V V Negative sequence Voltage
V0 MAG =000.000 V V Zero sequence Voltage
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 136 of 335
ADR245B
5.2 Measurement 2
Measurement2 displays the Real Power, Reactive Power, Apparent Power, Frequency and
Power factor based on the power system network.
Parameter Unit Description
PA = (- or +) 0000.000MW MW Real power of phase A
PB = (- or +) 0000.000MW MW Real power of phase B
PC = (- or +) 0000.000MW MW Real power of phase C
3P = (- or +) 0000.000MW MW Real power of three phase
QA= (- or +) 0000.000MVAr MVAr Reactive power of phase A
QB= (- or +) 0000.000MVAr MVAr Reactive power of phase B
QC= (- or +) 0000.000MVAr MVAr Reactive power of phase C
3Q= (- or +) 0000.000MVAr MVAr Reactive power of three phase
SA= 0000.0000MVA MVA Apparent power of phase A
SB= 0000.0000MVA MVA Apparent power of phase B
SC= 0000.0000MVA MVA Apparent power of phase C
3P= 0000.0000MVA MVA Apparent power of three phase
FREQ=00.00 Hz Hz Power frequency
PFA = 0.000 pu Power Factor of A Phase
PFB = 0.000 pu Power Factor of B Phase
PFC=0.000 pu Power Factor of C Phase
3PF= 0.000 pu Power Factor of three phase
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 137 of 335
ADR245B
Section 6
Setting Sheet
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/SS
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 139 of 335
ADR245B
Contents
6 SETTING SHEET 141
6.1 General Settings: 141
6.2 Ip Configuration 142
6.3 Group 1 Phase Overcurrent 142
6.4 Group 1 Ground Over current 143
6.5 Group 1 Residual Over current 144
6.5.1 3I0>1 function 144
6.5.2 3I0>3 function 145
6.6 Group 1 Sequence Overcurrent 145
6.7 Group 1 Under/Over Voltage. 146
6.7.1 Under Voltage 146
6.7.2 Over Voltage 147
6.8 Group 1 Residual Over Voltage 147
6.9 Group1 Sequence Over Voltage 147
6.10 Group1 I2/I1 (46BC) 148
6.11 Group1 I0/I1 (50BC) 148
6.12 Group1 VT Supervision 149
6.13 Group1 CT Supervision 149
6.14 Group1 Reclosing 150
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 140 of 335
ADR245B
6 SETTING SHEET
6.1 General Settings:

Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges
1. Password 0000 0000 to zzzz
This setting specifies to enter the set password
2. Group G1 G1 / G2
This setting used to select the G1/ G2 settings.
3. 50BF OFF Int/Ext/OFF
This setting is used to enable (activate) or disable (turn off) Internal Breaker initiation or External Breaker
Failure Initiation and also can bypass this function.
4. 50BF_I Enabled 10 to 200 in step of 1%
This setting is used to set the current threshold value above which the breaker failure will operate after
the set time delay is expired.
5. 50 BF Delay 0.3 s 0.1s to 0.2 s in steps of 0.01s
This setting for the time-delay for the CB fail trip.
6. PH CT Secondary 1A 1 A/5 A
This setting is used to set the phase CT Secondary
7. PH CT Primary 10 A 10 to 5000 A in step of 1A
This setting is used to set the phase CT Primary.
8. EF CT Secondary 1A 1 A/5 A
This setting is used to set the Earth fault CT secondary.
9. EF CT Primary 10 A 10 to 5000 A in step of 1A
This setting is used to set the Earth fault CT Primary.
10. VT Primary 1 kV 1 to 400 kV in step of 0.1kV(L-L)
This setting is used to set the VT Primary.
11. VT Secondary 63.5 V(Ln) Read only
This setting is used to set the VT secondary.
12. Local Control OFF OFF/ON
A Local Control parameter setting is provided with OFF or ON option. This is used to operate the relay
locally by pressing the Test button from the HMI when it is enabled.
13. TCS OFF OFF/ON
A Trip circuit supervision parameter setting is provided with OFF or ON option. This is used to monitor
trip coil which is used to trip the circuit breaker.
14. R Angle Offset 0 0 to 359 in step of 1
This setting is used to set the R Angle offset to Angle adjust the angle in R phase
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 141 of 335
ADR245B
15. Y Angle Offset 0 0 t0 359 in step of 1
This setting is used to set the R Angle offset to Angle adjust the angle in Y phase.
16. B Angle Offset 0 0 t0 359 in step of 1
This setting is used to set the R Angle offset to Angle adjust the angle in B phase.
17. Post Trigger 95% 5 to 95% in step of 1%
The Post Trigger is used to Pre-fault duration of the disturbance recorder.
6.2 Ip Configuration
2. IP address 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000
This setting is used to set the IP address of the Relay
3. Subnet mask 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000
This setting is used to set the subnet mask of the Relay
4. Default gateway 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000
The setting is used to set the default gateway
5. Pri.SNTP 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000
This setting is used to set pri,.SNTP
6. Sec.SNTP 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000
This setting is used to set Sec.SNTP
7. GMT 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000
This setting is used to set GMT
8. IED Name Xxxxxx Xxxxxx
This setting is used to set the name of the IED
6.3 Group 1 Phase Overcurrent

6.3.1 IP>1 function
2. IP>1 Enable OFF OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir/VC
This setting is used to disable or directional or non directional the over current protection function.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 142 of 335
ADR245B
3. IP>1 10% 10% -250% in step of 1%
The setting is used to set the pickup value above which the over current function will operate
4. IP>1 TMS 0.01 0.01 - 1.2 in steps of 0.001
The setting is used to set the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the over current
function
5. IP>1 Curve C1-Standard Inverse_1 C1-Standard Inverse_1/C2-Standard

Inverse_2/C3-Very Inverse /C4-
Extremely inverse/C5-Long Time
Inverse/C6-Define Time
This setting is used to select the IEC curves for the various applications.
6. tIP>1 C6 DT 0s 0-1899.9 in step of 0.01 s
This setting is used to set the definite time delay for over current function.
IP>2, IP>3 stages are similar of IP>1 settings
6.3.2 IP>4 function
1. IP>4 Enable OFF OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir
This setting is used to disable or directional or non directional the over current protection function.
2. IP>4 10% 50% -3000% in step of 1%
The setting is used to set the pickup value above which the over current function will operate.
3. tIP>4 DT 0.0 s 0-90s in step of 0.01 s
This setting is used to set the definite time delay for over current function.
4. Phase MTA 45 Deg 0 to 360 Lead
This setting is used to set maximum torque angle for directional operation of over current relay
6.4 Group 1 Ground Over current

6.4.1 IE>1 function
2. IE>1 Enable OFF OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir
This setting is used to disable or directional or non directional the Ground over current protection
function.
3. IE>1 5% 5% -200% in step of 1%
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 143 of 335
ADR245B
The setting is used to set the pickup value above which the Ground over current function will operate
4. IE>1 TMS 0.01 0.01 - 1.2 in steps of 0.001
The setting is used to set the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the over current
function
5. IE>1 Curve C1-Standard C1-Standard Inverse_1/C2-

Inverse_1 Standard Inverse_2/C3-Very
Inverse /C4-Extremely inverse/C5-
Long Time Inverse/C6-Define Time
6. tIE>1 C6 DT 0s 0-99.9s in step of 0.01 s
This setting is used to set the definite time delay for ground over current function.
IE>2 stages are similar to IE>1 settings
6.4.2 IE>3 function
1. IE>3 Enable OFF OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir
This setting is used to disable or directional or non directional ground over current protection function.
2. IE>3 50% 50% -2000% in step of 1%
The setting is used to set the pickup value above which the griund over current function will operate.
3. tIE>3 DT 0s 0 to 90 s in step of 0.01 s
This setting is used to set the definite time delay for ground over current function.
0
4. Ground MTA 45 Deg 0 t0 360 Lag in step of 5
This setting is used to set maximum torque angle for directional operation of ground over current relay
6.5 Group 1 Residual Over current

6.5.1 3I0>1 function
2. 3IO>1 Enable OFF OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir
This setting is used to disable or directional or non directional the Residual over current protection
function.
3. 3IO >1 10% 10% -200% in step of 1%
The setting is used to set the pickup value above which the Residual over current function will operate
4. 3I0>1 TMS 0.01 0.01 - 1.2 in steps of 0.001
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 144 of 335
ADR245B
The setting is used to set the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the Residual over
current function
5. 3I0>1 Curve C1-Standard C1-Standard Inverse_1/C2-

6. t3I0>1 C6 DT 0s 0-99.9s in step of 0.01 s
This setting is used to set the definite time delay for Residual over current function.
3I0>2 stages are similar to 3I0>1 settings.
6.5.2 3I0>3 function
1. 3I0>3 Enable OFF OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir
This setting is used to disable or directional or non directional ground over current protection function.
2. 3I0>3 50% 50% -3000% in step of 10%
The setting is used to set the pickup value above which the Residual over current function will operate.
3. tIE>3 DT 0.0 s 0 to 90 s in step of 0.01 s
0
4. 3I0 MTA 45 0 t0 360 Lag in step of 5
This setting is used to set maximum torque angle for directional operation of Residual over current relay
6.6 Group 1 Sequence Overcurrent

6.6.1 Seq.I>1 function
2. Seq.I>1 Enable OFF OFF/+Seq/-Seq
This setting is used to disable or enable the Negative Phase sequence over current protection function.
3. Seq.I>1 10% 10% -200% in step of 1%
The setting is used to set the pickup value above which Negative Phase sequence over current function
will operate
4. Seq.I>1 TMS 0.01 0.01 - 1.2 in steps of 0.001
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 145 of 335
ADR245B
The setting is used to set the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the Negative Phase
sequence over current function.
5. Seq.I>1 Curve C1-Standard C1-Standard Inverse_1/C2-

6. t Seq.I>1 >1 C6 DT 0s 0-99.9s in step of 0.01 s
This setting is used to set the definite time delay for Negative Phase sequence over current function.
6.6.2 Seq.I>2 function
Sr. Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges

No
1. Seq.I>2 Enable OFF OFF/+Seq/-Seq
This setting is used to disable or directional or non directional Negative Phase sequence over current
protection function.
2. Seq.I>2 100% 50% -1500% in step of 1%
The setting is used to set the pickup value above which the Negative Phase sequence over current
function will operate.
3. tSeq.I>2 DT 0.0 s 0 to 90 s in step of 0.01 s
6.7 Group 1 Under/Over Voltage.

6.7.1 Under Voltage
2. Under Voltage OFF OFF/ON/AND/+SEQ
This setting is used to off the Under Voltage protection function or can be selected as AND or+SEQ
3. V< 5% 5% -100% in step of 1%
The setting is used to set the pickup value above which Under Voltage function will operate
4. tV< 0.0 s 0 - 99.0s in step of 0.1 s

This setting is used to set the definite time delay for Under Voltage protection function.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 146 of 335
ADR245B
6.7.2 Over Voltage
2. Over Voltage OFF OFF/ON/AND
This setting is used to disable or enable the Over Voltage protection function.
3. V> 110% 105% -155% in step of 1%
The setting is used to set the pickup value above which Over Voltage function will operate
4. tV> 10 s 0 - 99.0s in step of 0.1 s

This setting is used to set the definite time delay for Over Voltage protection function.
6.8 Group 1 Residual Over Voltage

2. Residual O/V OFF OFF/Measured/Derived
This setting is used to disable or enable the Over Voltage protection function.
3. VN> 10V 10 -100V in step of 0.1V
The setting is used to set the pickup value above which Residual Over Voltage function will operate
4. tVN > 0s 0 - 99.9s in step of 0.01 s

This setting is used to set the definite time delay for Residual Over Voltage protection function.
6.9 Group1 Sequence Over Voltage

2. Seq.V>1 OFF OFF/+Seq/-Seq
This setting is used to disable or enable the sequence Voltage protection function.
3. Seq.V>1 30V 5.0 - 100.0V in steps of 0.1V
This setting is used to set the sequence Voltage pickup value above which the relay will pickup.
4. t Seq.V>1>1 0s 0 - 99.9s in step of 0.01 s

The setting is used to set the time delay for the sequence Over Voltage function trip.
5. Seq.V >2 -Seq OFF/+Seq/-Seq
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 147 of 335
ADR245B
6. Seq.V>2 30V 5.0 - 100.0V in steps of 0.1V
7. t Seq.V >2 0s 0 - 99.9s in step of 0.01 s

The setting is used to set the time delay for the sequence Over Voltage function trip.
6.10 Group1 I2/I1 (46BC)
2. I2/I1>1 OFF OFF/ON/&I2/&50BC
This setting is used to disable or enable the broken conductor function.
3. I2/I1>1 0.1pu 0.1 to 1.0 step 0.01pu
The setting is used to set time delay for the broken conductor pickup.
4. tI2/I1>1 0s 0 to 99.0 s in steps of 0.01 s
The setting is used to set the ratio of the I2/I1 for the Broken conductor trip
5. I2/I1>2 No OFF/ON
6. I2/I1>2 20% 20% to 250% step 1%
7. tI2/I1>2 0s 0 to 100 s in steps of 0.01 s
The setting is used to set time delay for the broken conductor trip.
6.11 Group1 I0/I1 (50BC)

2. I0/I1>1 No OFF/ON
3. I0/I1>1 0.1pu 0.1 to 1.0 step 0.01pu
4. tI0/I1>1 0s 0 to 99.0 s in steps of 0.01 s
The setting is used to set the ratio of the I0/I1 for the Broken conductor trip
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 148 of 335
ADR245B
6.12 Group1 VT Supervision

2. VTS OFF OFF/Int/Ext
This setting is used to Off or select the VT supervision internal or External option.
3. Ext VTS Ip High High/Low
This setting is used to set the MCB status type depends Normally open coil or Normally closed coil. This
setting is only applicable for External VTS function.
4. V1 5.0V 5 -100V in step of 1V
The setting is used to set the positive sequence voltage value above which VTS function will be
initiated
5. V2 5.0V 5 -100V in step of 1V
The setting is used to set the negative sequence voltage value above which VTS function will be
initiated
6. I1 10% 10% -200% in step of 1%
The setting is used to set the positive sequence current value below which VTS function will be initiated
7. I2 10% 10% -200% in step of 1%
The setting is used to set the Negative sequence current value above which VTS function will be
differentiate the fault and VT fuse fail.
8. I0 10% 10% -200% in step of 1%
The setting is used to set the zero sequence current value above which VTS function will be differentiate
the fault and VT fuse fail.
9. VTS Delay 1.0 s 1 to 30.0s in step of 0.1 s

This setting is used to set the VTS time delay for VTS function.
6.13 Group1 CT Supervision

2. CTS OFF OFF/ON
This setting is used to disable or select the CT supervision internal or External option.
3. 37I< 0.05 0.05 to 1.5pu in step 0.01
The setting is used to set the positive sequence current value above which CTS function will be initiated
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 149 of 335
ADR245B
4. I2/I1 0.05 pu 0.05 to 1pu in step 0.01
The setting is used to set ratio of the negative sequence to positive sequence current value above
which CTS function will be initiated
5. I0/I1 0.05 pu 0.05 to 1 pu in step 0.01
The setting is used to set ratio of the zero sequence to positive sequence current value above which
CTS function will be initiated.
6. V1 5.0V 5 -100V in step of 1V
The setting is used to set the positive sequence Voltage value below which CTS function will be
initiated
7. V2 5.0V 5 -100V in step of 1V
The setting is used to set the Negative sequence voltage value above which CTS function will be
differentiate the fault and CT fuse fail.
8. V0 5.0V 5 -100V in step of 1V
The setting is used to set the zero sequence voltage value above which CTS function will be
differentiate the fault and CT fuse fail.
9. CTS Delay 1.0 s 1 to 30.0s in step of 0.1 s

This setting is used to set the CTS time delay for CTS function.
6.14 Group1 Reclosing

2. Reclosing OFF OFF/ 1 to 4 in step of 1
This setting is used to disable or set the No of reclosing shots.
3. Dead Time 1 0.1s 0.10 to 180.00s
This setting is used to set the dead time 1
4. Dead Time 2 0.1s 0.10 to 180.00s
5. Dead Time 3 0.1s 0.10 to 180.00s
6. Dead Time 4 0.1s 0.10 to 180.00s
7. Reclaim Time 0.1 s 10.0s to 300.0 s in step of 1s
This setting is used to set the Reclaim time.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 150 of 335
ADR245B
Section 7
Communication
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 152 of 335
ADR245B
Contents
7 COMMUNICATIONS 154
7.1 MODBUS 154
7.2 MODBUS Protocol Map 154
7.3 IEC60-870-5-103 160
7.4 Physical Connection and Link Layer 160
7.5 Initialisation 160
7.6 Time Synchronisation 161
7.7 Spontaneous Events 161
7.8 General Interrogation (GI) 161
7.9 Cyclic Measurements 161
7.10 Commands 162
7.11 Disturbance Records 162
7.12 Configuration 162
7.13 Protocol Mapping: 162
7.14 IEC61850 Overview 167
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 153 of 335
ADR245B
7 COMMUNICATIONS
7.1 MODBUS
This section describes how the MODBUS standard is applied to the RTV2 platform. It is not a
description of the standard itself. The level at which this section is written assumes that the
reader is already familiar with the MODBUS standard.
The MODBUS protocol is a master/slave protocol, defined and administered by the

MODBUS Organization. For further information on MODBUS and the protocol specifications
please see the Modbus web site (www.modbus.org).
Overview: Physical Connection and Link Layer
For connecting on MODBUS use:

Rear serial port 1 - for permanent SCADA connection via EIA (RS) 485
The MODBUS interface uses ‘RTU’ mode communication rather than ‘ASCII’ mode as this
provides more efficient use of the communication bandwidth. This mode of communication is
defined by the MODBUS standard.
The IED address and baud rate can be selected using the front panel menu or
ASHIDARelayTalk RTV2 Software.
When using a serial interface, the data format is: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and 1 parity
bit.
7.2 MODBUS Protocol Map
Function Codes supported:
Code Function Name
02 Read Input Status

03 Read Holding Registers
04 Read Input Registers
05 Force Single Coil
16 Preset Multiple Registers
Exception Codes generated in case of an error:
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 154 of 335
ADR245B
MODBUS Response
Code Product interpretation
Name
The function code received in query is not supported by the

01 Illegal Function Code
IED.
02 Illegal Data Address The start address received in the query is not an allowable
value.
NOTE: If the start address received is correct but the range
includes unsupported address this error is produced.
NOTE: The addresses of the MODBUS registers start from 1 and the user may have to subtract 1 from the
addresses, depending upon the configuration of the Master station configuration.
Function No. of Reg.

Sr. No. Register Format Address Map
Code Regs Type
Product
1 03
Information
Manufacturer 20-Bytes 0x0000 to

10 R
Name ASCII 0x0009
20-Bytes 0x000A to
Relay Name 10 R
ASCII 0x0013
20-Bytes 0x0014 to
Model 10 R
ASCII 0x001D
20-Bytes 0x001E to
Version 10 R
ASCII 0x0027
Relay 20-Bytes 0x004A to
10 R
Description ASCII 0x0053
Sr. No. Function Register No. of Format Reg. Address Map

Code Regs Type
2 Relay
03
Configuration
Num Status (s) 1 16 bit R 0x0101

Num Controls (c) 1 16 bit R 0x0102
Num Parameters 1 16 bit R 0x0103
(p)
Num Faults (f) 1 16 bit R 0x0104
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 155 of 335
ADR245B

Code Regs Type
3 Time 03/16
Synchronization
(Unicast /
Broadcast)
Year 1 16 bit R/W 0x0201
Month- Day 1 16 bit R/W 0x0202
Hour, Min 1 16 bit R/W 0x0203
Milliseconds 1 16 bit R/W 0x0204

Code Regs Type
4 Status and 02
Logical Status
IN 1 1 1 bit R 0x8000
IN 2 1 1 bit R 0x8001
IN 3 1 1 bit R 0x8002
IN 4 1 1 bit R 0x8003
IN 5 1 1 bit R 0x8004
IN 6 1 1 bit R 0x8005
IN 7 1 1 bit R 0x8006
IN 8 1 1 bit R 0x8007
IN 9 1 1 bit R 0x8008
IN A 1 1 bit R 0x8009
IN B 1 1 bit R 0x800A
IN C 1 1 bit R 0x800B
ARR active 1 1 bit R 0x800C
Protection 1 1 bit R 0x800D
active
Test 1 1 bit R 0x800E
Trip Ckt.svn 1 1 bit R 0x800f
Strt A 1 1 bit R 0x8010
Strt B 1 1 bit R 0x8011
Strt C 1 1 bit R 0x8012
General Start 1 1 bit R 0x8013
IP>1 P 1 1 bit R 0x8014
IP>3 P 1 1 bit R 0x8015
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 156 of 335
ADR245B
IP>4 P 1 1 bit R 0x8016

General Trip 1 1 bit R 0x8017
Trip A 1 1 bit R 0x8018
Trip B 1 1 bit R 0x8019
Trip C 1 1 bit R 0x801A
Trip CBF 1 1 bit R 0x801B
Trip IP>1 1 1 bit R 0x801C
Trip IP>3 1 1 bit R 0x801D
Trip IP>4 1 1 bit R 0x801E
Trip 3io>1 1 1 bit R 0x801F
Trip 3io>2 1 1 bit R 0x8020
Trip 3io>3 1 1 bit R 0x8021
Trip IE>1 1 1 bit R 0x8022
Trip Seq I>1 1 1 bit R 0x8025
Trip Seq I>2 1 1 bit R 0x8026
V<A P 1 1 bit R 0x8027
V<B P 1 1 bit R 0x8028
V<C P 1 1 bit R 0x8029
Trip V<A 1 1 bit R 0x802A
Trip V<B 1 1 bit R 0x802B
Trip V<C 1 1 bit R 0x802C
V>A P 1 1 bit R 0x802D
V>B P 1 1 bit R 0x802E
V>C P 1 1 bit R 0x802F
Trip V>A 1 1 bit R 0x8030
Trip V>B 1 1 bit R x8031
Trip V>C 1 1 bit R 0x8032
3io>1 P 1 1 bit R 0x8033
3io>2 P 1 1 bit R 0x8034
3io>3 P 1 1 bit R 0x8035
IE>1 P 1 1 bit R 0x8036
IE>2 P 1 1 bit R 0x8037
IE>3 P 1 1 bit R 0x8038
Seq I>1 P 1 1 bit R 0x8039
Seq I>2 P 1 1 bit R 0x803A
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 157 of 335
ADR245B
79 blocked 1 1 bit R 0x803B

79 Lockout 1 1 bit R 0x803C
79 Reclaim 1 1 bit R 0x803D
IP>2 P 1 1 bit R 0x803E
Trip IP>2 1 1 bit R 0x803F
VN> P 1 1 bit R 0x8040
Trip VN> 1 1 bit R 0x8041
VTS Alarm 1 1 bit R 0x8042
CTS Alarm 1 1 bit R 0x8043
Seq V>1 P 1 1 bit R 0x8044
Seq V>2 P 1 1 bit R 0x8045
Seq V>1 T 1 1 bit R 0x8046
Seq V>2 T 1 1 bit R 0x8047
I2/I1>1 P 1 1 bit R 0x8048
I2/I1>2 P 1 1 bit R 0x8049
I2/I1>1 T 1 1 bit R 0x804A
I2/I1>2 T 1 1 bit R 0x804B
I0/I1>2 P 1 1 bit R 0x804C
I0/I1>2 T 1 1 bit R 0x804D

Code Regs Type
5 Outputs 05
OUT 1 1 16 bit W 0x8100
OUT 2 1 16 bit W 0x8101
OUT 3 1 16 bit W 0x8102
OUT 4 1 16 bit W 0x8103
OUT 5 1 16 bit W 0x8104
OUT 6 1 16 bit W 0x8105
OUT 7 1 16 bit W 0x8106
OUT 8 1 16 bit W 0x8107
OUT 9 1 16 bit W 0x8108
OUT A 1 16 bit W 0x8109
OUT B 1 16 bit W 0x810A
CB Trip 1 16 bit W 0x810B
CB Close 1 16 bit W 0x810C
LED Reset 1 16 bit W 0x810D
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 158 of 335
ADR245B

Code Regs Type
6 Parameters 04
IAMAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x8200-x8201
IBMAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x8202-x8203
ICMAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x8204-x8205
INMAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x8206-x8207
3I0MAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x8208-x8209
I1MAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x820A-x820B
I2MAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x820C-x820D
VANMAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x820E-x820F
VBNMAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x8210-x8211
VCNMAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x8212-x8213
VNMAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x8214-x8215
3V0MAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x8216-x8217
VABMAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x8218-x8219
VBCMAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x821A-x821B
VCAMAG 2 32 bit Float R 0x821C-x821D
PFA 2 32 bit Float R 0x821E-x821F
PFB 2 32 bit Float R 0x8220-x8221
PFC 2 32 bit Float R 0x8222-x8223
FREQ 2 32 bit Float R 0x8224-x8225
PA 2 32 bit Float R 0x8226-x8227
PB 2 32 bit Float R 0x8228-x8229
PC 2 32 bit Float R 0x822A-x822B
QA 2 32 bit Float R 0x822C-x822D
QB 2 32 bit Float R 0x822E-x822F
QC 2 32 bit Float R 0x8230-x8231
SA 2 32 bit Float R 0x8232-x8233
SB 2 32 bit Float R 0x8234-x8235
SC 2 32 bit Float R 0x8236-x8237
TA1 2 32 bit Float R 0x8238-x8239
TA2 2 32 bit Float R 0x823A-x823B
TA3 2 32 bit Float R 0x823C-x823D
V1 2 32 bit Float R 0x823E-x823F
V2 2 32 bit Float R 0x8240-x8241
3P 2 32 bit Float R 0x8242-x8243
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 159 of 335
ADR245B
3Q 2 32 bit Float R 0x8244-x8245

3S 2 32 bit Float R 0x8246-x8247
3PF 2 32 bit Float R 0x8248-x8249
7.3 IEC60-870-5-103
The specification IEC 60870-5-103 (Telecontrol Equipment and Systems Part 5 Section 103:
Transmission Protocols), defines the use of standards IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5,
which were designed for communication with protection equipment.
This section describes how the IEC 60870-5-103 standard is applied to the ADR245B Relay.
It is not a description of the standard itself. The level at which this section is written assumes
that the reader is already familiar with the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
This section should provide sufficient detail to enable understanding of the standard at a
level required by most users.
The IEC 60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the device as the slave
device. The device conforms to compatibility level 2, as defined in the IEC 60870-5-
103.standard.
The following IEC 60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
• Initialization (reset)
• Time synchronisation
• Event record extraction
• General interrogation
• Cyclic measurements
• General commands
• Disturbance record extraction
7.4 Physical Connection and Link Layer

For connecting on IEC 60870-5-103 there are two options:
• Front USB Port.
• Rear serial port 1 - for permanent SCADA connection via EIA(RS)485.
The IED address and baud rate can be selected using the front panel menu or with P50 Agile
Configurator.
7.5 Initialisation
Whenever the device has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have been
changed, a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The device will
respond to either of the two reset commands; Reset CU or Reset FCB (Communication Unit
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 160 of 335
ADR245B
or Frame Count Bit). The difference between the two commands is that the Reset CU
command will clear any unsent messages in the transmit buffer, whereas the Reset FCB
command does not delete any messages.
The device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5. The
Cause of Transmission (COT) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command.
The relay will also produce a power up event, when the relay is powered up.
7.6 Time Synchronisation

The time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the IEC 60870-5-103
protocol. The device will correct the transmission delay depending on communication speed.
For this, transmission time, required for the time synchronization frame from the Master to
IED, considering current baud rate is added in the received time.
The device will correct the transmission delay depending on baud rate. If the time
synchronisation message is sent as a send/confirm message then the device will respond
with a confirm message. A time synchronisation Class 1 event will be generated/produced
whether the time-synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast
(send/no reply) message.
7.7 Spontaneous Events

Events are categorized using the following information:
Function type
Information Number
The IEC 60870-5-103 profile in the Menu Database contains a complete listing of all events
produced by the device.
7.8 General Interrogation (GI)

The GI request can be used to read the status of the device, the function numbers, and
information numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle. These are shown in the IEC
60870-5-103 profile in the Menu Database.
7.9 Cyclic Measurements

The device will produce measured values using ASDU 3 or ASDU 9 & ASDU244. ASDU3
will be reported with information number 147 and ASDU9 is reported with information
number 148 and ASDU244 is reported with information number 0. These three frames are
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 161 of 335
ADR245B
reported alternately. This can be read from the device using a Class 2 poll. For every query
the current online data is reported.
The device transmits its measurands at 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value.
7.10 Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in the section 2.2.11 Protocol Mapping (Sr.
No.8). The device will respond to valid Control Command with ASDU1 and a cause of
transmission indicating ‘Positive (COT-20) / Negative (COT-21) acknowledgement’. The
device will respond to commands with invalid FUN/ INF combination with an ASDU 1, with a
cause of transmission indicating ‘negative acknowledgement’.
7.11 Disturbance Records

The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC 60870-5-103. This relay supports up-to 5 records.
7.12 Configuration
To configure the IED for this protocol, please see the Configuration chapter.
7.13 Protocol Mapping:
Sr. No. INF Description GI TYP COT FUN
1 Semantics of INFORMATION NUMBER : System Functions in monitor direction

0 End of general interrogation - 8 10 255
0 Time synchronization - 6 8 255
2 Reset FCB - 5 3 160
3 Reset CU - 5 4 160
4 Start/Restart - 5 5 160
5 Power on - 5 6 160
Note: X under GI heading means DI Status is included in General Interrogation response.
2 Semantics of INFORMATION NUMBER : Status Indications in monitor direction

16 Trip LED X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 160
18 79 Active X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 160
21 Protection active X 1 9,11 127
22 Test X 1 9,11, 12 160
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 162 of 335
ADR245B
27 Local Parameter X 1 1,7,9,11 160

setting
28 IN 1 X 1 1,7,9,11 160
29 IN 2 X 1 1,7,9,11 160
30 IN 3 X 1 1,7,9,11 160
31 IN 4 X 1 1,7,9,11 127
32 IN 5 X 1 1,7,9,11 127
33 IN 6 X 1 1,7,9,11 127
34 IN 7 X 1 1,7,9,11 127
35 IN 8 X 1 1,7,9,11 127
36 IN 9 X 1 1,7,9,11 127
137 IN A X 1 1,7,9,11 127
136 IN B X 1 1,7,9,11 127
92 IN C X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 127
93 OUT 1 X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 127
94 OUT 2 X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 127
95 OUT 3 X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 127
96 OUT 4 X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 127
97 OUT 5 X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 127
98 OUT 6 X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 127
99 OUT 7 X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 127
100 OUT 8 X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 127
101 OUT 9 X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 127
102 OUT A X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 127
124 OUT B X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 127
125 Trip X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 127
16 Close X 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 127

3 Semantics of INFORMATION NUMBER : Fault indications in monitor direction
68 General Trip 2 1,7 160
69 Trip A 2 1,7 160
70 Trip B 2 1,7 160
71 Trip C 2 1,7 160
90 Trip IP>1 X 2 1,7 160
162 Trip IP>2 X 2 1,7 126
91 Trip IP>3 X 2 1,7 160
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 163 of 335
ADR245B
104 Trip IP>4 X 2 1,7 126

127 Trip seq I>1 - 2 1,7 126
128 Trip seq I>2 - 2 1,7 126
123 Trip IE>1 - 2 1,7 126
124 Trip IE>2 - 2 1,7 126
125 Trip IE>3 - 2 1,7 126
92 Trip 3io >1 - 2 1,7 160

93 Trip 3io >2 X 2 1,7 160
121 Trip 3io >3 X 2 1,7 126
116 Trip V < A - 2 1,7 126
129 Trip V < B - 2 1,7 126
130 Trip V < C - 2 1,7 126
131 Trip V > A - 2 1,7 126
132 Trip V > B - 2 1,7 126
133 Trip V > C - 2 1,7 126
165 Trip VN > - 2 1,7 126
219 Trip seq V > 1 - 2 1,7 124
220 Trip seq V > 2 - 2 1,7 124
9 Trip I2/I1 > 1 - 2 1,7 124
215 Trip I2/I1 > 2 - 2 1,7 124
221 Trip I0/I1 > 1 - 2 1,7 124
38 VTS alarm X 2 1,7 160
222 CTS alarm X 2 1,7 124
85 Trip CBF X 2 1,7 160
223 LED Status X 20 1, 7, 9 124
21 Test X 2 1,7 127
4 Semantics of INFORMATION NUMBER : Measurands in monitor direction

148 Measurands IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, P, -
9 2,7 160
Q, f
147 Measurands IN, VEN - 3 2,7 160
0 IaMAG; IbMAG; IcMAG; - 244 2,7 127
InMAG; I1MAG; I2MAG;
3I0MAG; VanMAG;
VbnMAG; VcnMAG;
VnMAG; VabMAG;
VbcMAG; VcaMAG;
V1MAG; V2MAG;
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 164 of 335
ADR245B
3V0MAG; PA; PB; PC;

3P; QA; QB; QC; 3Q;
SA; SB; SC; 3S; FREQ; PFA;
PFB; PFC; 3PF
5 Semantics of INFORMATION NUMBER: Fault list in monitor direction

List of Recorded
0 - 23 31 160
DR
Sr. No. INF Description
6 Semantics of Actual Channel : Used for DR Transmission

ACC Description
1 IaMAG
2 IbMAG
3 IcMAG
4 3I0MAG
5 VanMAG
6 VbnMAG
7 VcnMAG
8 3V0MAG
74 InMAG
129 I1MAG
130 I2MAG
131 V1MAG
132 V2MAG
75 VnMAG
84 General start/ pick-up
64 Strt A
65 Strt B
66 Strt C
117 IP > 1 P
161 IP > 2 P
103 IP > 3 P
105 IP > 4 P
146 Seq I > 1 P
147 Seq I > 2 P
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 165 of 335
ADR245B
143 IE > 1 P
144 IE > 2 P
145 IE > 3 P
140 3io > 1 P
141 3io > 2 P
142 3io > 3 P
134 V<AP
135 V<BP
136 V<CP
137 V>AP
138 V>BP
139 V>CP
174 VN > P
216 Seq V > 1 P
217 Seq V > 2 P
3 I2/I1 > 1 P
25 I2/I1 > 2 P
218 I0/I1 > 1 P
27 IN 1
28 IN 2
29 IN 3
30 IN 4
31 IN 5
32 IN 6
33 IN 7
34 IN 8
35 IN 9
36 IN A
137 IN B
136 IN C
16 79 Active
108 79 Reclaim
107 79 Lockout
36 TCS Alarm
145 Relay error
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 166 of 335
ADR245B
7 Semantics of INFORMATION NUMBER : System Functions in control direction

Initialization of
0 - 7 9 255
general interrogation
Time
0 - 6 8 255
synchronization
8 Semantics of INFORMATION NUMBER : General commands in control direction

22 Local para ON 1 9, 11, 12 160
19 LED reset ON 20 20 160
124 CB Trip ON/OFF 20 20 127
125 CB Close ON/OFF 20 1, 7, 9, 11 127
92 OUT 1 ON/OFF 20 1, 7, 9, 11 127
93 OUT 2 ON/OFF 20 1, 7, 9, 11 127
94 OUT 3 ON/OFF 20 1, 7, 9, 11 127
95 OUT 4 ON/OFF 20 1, 7, 9, 11 127
96 OUT 5 ON/OFF 20 1, 7, 9, 11 127
97 OUT 6 ON/OFF 20 1, 7, 9, 11 127
98 OUT 7 ON/OFF 20 1, 7, 9, 11 127
99 OUT 8 ON/OFF 20 1, 7, 9, 11 127
100 OUT 9 ON/OFF 20 1, 7, 9, 11 127
101 OUT A ON/OFF 20 1, 7, 9, 11 127
102 OUT B ON/OFF 20 1, 7, 9, 11 127
7.14 IEC61850 Overview

This section describes how the IEC61850 standard is applied to the RTV2 platform. It is not
a description of the standard itself. The level at which this section is written assumes that the
reader is already familiar with the IEC61850 standard.
Protocol map
Ip1> Directional Time Over current Stage 1 (67)

Data attribute db Item Type Events Dataset
Ip1PTOC1$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x0100 INT32 0x0100 (inc by 1) dchg
Ip1PTOC1$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel status-only ENUM
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 167 of 335
ADR245B
Ip1PTOC1$ST$Str$general 0x0101 BOOLEAN 0x0101 (true), dchg

0x0102 (false)
Ip1PTOC1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0102 ENUM 0x0103 (unknown), dchg
(unknown=0) 0x0104 (forward),
0x0105 (backward),
0x0106 (both)
Ip1PTOC1$ST$Op$general 0x0103 BOOLEAN 0x0107 (true), dchg
0x0108 (false)
Ip2> Directional Time Overcurrent Stage 1 (67)

Data attribute db item Type Events Dataset
0x0202 (false)
Ip2PTOC2$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0202 ENUM 0x0203 dchg
(unknown=0) (unknown),
0x0204 (forward),
0x0205
(backward),
0x0206 (both)
0x0208 (false)
Ip3> Directional Time Overcurrent Stage 2 (67)

0x0302 (false)
Ip3PTOC3$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0302 ENUM 0x0303 (unknown), dchg
0x0305
(backward),
0x0306 (both)
0x0308 (false)
Ip4> Directional Instantaneous Overcurrent (50)

Ip4PIOC1$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x0400 INT32 0x0400 (inc by 1) dchg
Ip4PIOC1$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel status-only ENUM
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 168 of 335
ADR245B
Ip4PIOC1$ST$Str$general 0x0401 BOOLEAN 0x0401 (true), dchg

0x0402 (false)
Ip4PIOC1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0402 ENUM 0x0403 dchg
0x0404 (forward),
0x0405
(backward),
0x0406 (both)
Ip4PIOC1$ST$Op$general 0x0403 BOOLEAN 0x0407 (true), dchg
0x0408 (false)
Ie1> Directional Time Earth (67N)
Ie1PTOC4$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x0500 INT32 0x0500 (inc by 1) dchg

Ie1PTOC4$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel status-only ENUM
Ie1PTOC4$ST$Str$general 0x0501 BOOLEAN 0x0501 (true), dchg
0x0502 (false)
Ie1PTOC4$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0502 ENUM 0x0503 dchg
0x0504
(forward),
0x0505
(backward),
0x0506 (both)
Ie1PTOC4$ST$Op$general 0x0503 BOOLEAN 0x0507 (true), dchg
0x0508 (false)
Ie2> Directional Time Earth (67N)

Ie2PTOC5$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x0600 INT32 0x0600 (inc by 1) dchg
Ie2PTOC5$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel status-only ENUM
Ie2PTOC5$ST$Str$general 0x0601 BOOLEAN 0x0601 (true), dchg
0x0602 (false)
Ie2PTOC5$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0602 ENUM 0x0603 (unknown), dchg
0x0605 (backward),
0x0606 (both)
Ie2PTOC5$ST$Op$general 0x0603 BOOLEAN 0x0607 (true), dchg
0x0608 (false)
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 169 of 335
ADR245B
Ie3> Directional Instantaneous Earth (50N)

Ie3PIOC2$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x0700 INT32 0x0700 (inc by 1) dchg
Ie3PIOC2$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel status-only ENUM
Ie3PIOC2$ST$Str$general 0x0701 BOOLEAN 0x0701 (true), 0x0702 dchg
(false)
Ie3PIOC2$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0702 ENUM 0x0703 (unknown), dchg
0x0705 (backward),
0x0706 (both)
Ie3PIOC2$ST$Op$general 0x0703 BOOLEAN 0x0707 (true), 0x0708 dchg
(false)
3io1> Directional Time Earth (67N)

3io1PTOC6$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x0800 INT32 0x0800 (inc by 1) dchg
3io1PTOC6$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel status-only ENUM
3io1PTOC6$ST$Str$general 0x0801 BOOLEAN 0x0801 (true), 0x0802 dchg
(false)
3io1PTOC6$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0802 ENUM 0x0803 (unknown), dchg
0x0805 (backward),
0x0806 (both)
3io1PTOC6$ST$Op$general 0x0803 BOOLEAN 0x0807 (true), 0x0808 dchg
(false)
3io>2 Directional Time Earth (67N)

3io2PTOC7$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x0900 INT32 0x0900 (inc by 1) dchg
3io2PTOC7$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel Stats-only ENUM
3io2PTOC7$ST$Str$general 0x0901 BOOLEAN 0x0901 (true), dchg
0x0902 (false)
3io2PTOC7$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0902 ENUM 0x0903 (unknown), dchg
0x0905 (backward),
0x0906 (both)
3io>2PTOC7$ST$Op$general 0x0903 BOOLEAN 0x0907 (true), dchg
0x0908 (false)
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 170 of 335
ADR245B
3io>3 Directional Instantaneous Earth (50N)

3io3PIOC3$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x0A00 INT32 0x0A00 (inc by 1) dchg
3io3PIOC3$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel status-only ENUM
3io3PIOC3$ST$Str$general 0x0A01 BOOLEAN 0x0A01 (true), dchg
0x0A02 (false)
3io3PIOC3$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0A02 ENUM 0x0A03 (unknown), dchg
(unknown=0) 0x0A04 (forward),
0x0A05 (backward),
0x0A06 (both)
3io3PIOC3$ST$Op$general 0x0A03 BOOLEAN 0x0A07 (true), dchg
0x0A08 (false)
Seq I>1 Phase Sequence Time Overcurrent (46)

SeqI1PTOC8$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x0B00 INT32 0x0B00 (inc by 1) dchg
SeqI1PTOC8$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel Stats-only ENUM
SeqI1PTOC8$ST$Str$general 0x0B01 BOOLEAN 0x0B01 (true), dchg
0x0B02 (false)
SeqI1PTOC8$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0B02 ENUM 0x0B03 (unknown), dchg
(unknown=0) 0x0B04 (forward),
0x0B05 (backward),
0x0B06 (both)
SeqI1PTOC8$ST$Op$general 0x0B03 BOOLEAN 0x0B07 (true), dchg
0x0B08 (false)
Seq I>2 Negative Phase Sequence Instantaneous (46)

SeqI2PIOC4$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x0C00 INT32 0x0C00 (inc by 1) dchg
SeqI2PIOC4$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel Status-only ENUM
SeqI2PIOC4$ST$Str$general 0x0C01 BOOLEAN 0x0C01 (true), dchg
0x0C02 (false)
SeqI2PIOC4$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0C02 ENUM 0x0C03 (unknown), dchg
(unknown=0) 0x0C04 (forward),
0x0C05 (backward),
0x0C06 (both)
SeqI2PIOC4$ST$Op$general 0x0C03 BOOLEAN 0x0C07 (true), dchg
0x0C08 (false)
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 171 of 335
ADR245B
V< Under-Voltage (27)

UVPTUV1$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x0D00 INT32 0x0D00 (inc by 1) dchg
UVPTUV1$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel Status-only ENUM
UVPTUV1$ST$Str$general 0x0D01 BOOLEAN 0x0D01 (true), dchg
0x0D02 (false)
UVPTUV1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0D02 ENUM 0x0D03 (unknown), dchg
(unknown=0) 0x0D04 (forward),
0x0D05 (backward),
0x0D06 (both)
UVPTUV1$ST$Op$general 0x0D03 BOOLEAN 0x0D07 (true), dchg
0x0D08 (false)
V> Over-Voltage (59)

OVPTOV1$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x0E00 INT32 0x0E00 (inc by 1) dchg
OVPTOV1$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel Status-only ENUM
OVPTOV1$ST$Str$general 0x0E01 BOOLEAN 0x0E01 (true), dchg
0x0E02 (false)
OVPTOV1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0E02 ENUM 0x0E03 (unknown), dchg
(unknown=0) 0x0E04 (forward),
0x0E05 (backward),
0x0E06 (both)
OVPTOV1$ST$Op$general 0x0E03 BOOLEAN 0x0E07 (true), dchg
0x0E08 (false)
NVD Neutral Voltage Displacement (59N)
NVDPTOV2$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x0F00 INT32 0x0F00 (inc by 1) dchg

NVDPTOV2$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel Status-only ENUM
NVDPTOV2$ST$Str$general 0x0F01 BOOLEAN 0x0F01 (true), dchg
0x0F02 (false)
NVDPTOV2$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x0F02 ENUM 0x0F03 (unknown), dchg
(unknown=0) 0x0F04 (forward),
0x0F05 (backward),
0x0F06 (both)
NVDPTOV2$ST$Op$general 0x0F03 BOOLEAN 0x0F07 (true), dchg
0x0F08 (false)
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 172 of 335
ADR245B
SeqV1 Sequence Voltage Over-Voltage (xx)

SeqV1PTOV3$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x1900 INT32 0x1900 (inc by 1) dchg
SeqV1PTOV3$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel Status-only ENUM
SeqV1PTOV3$ST$Str$general 0x1901 BOOLEAN 0x1901 (true), dchg
0x1902 (false)
SeqV1PTOV3$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x1902 ENUM 0x1903 (unknown), dchg
0x1905 (backward),
0x1906 (both)
SeqV1PTOV3$ST$Op$general 0x1903 BOOLEAN 0x1907 (true), dchg
0x1908 (false)
SeqV2 Sequence Voltage Over-Voltage (xx)

SeqV2PTOV4$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x1A00 INT32 0x1A00 (inc by 1) dchg
SeqV2PTOV4$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel Status-only ENUM
SeqV2PTOV4$ST$Str$general 0x1A01 BOOLEAN 0x1A01 (true), dchg
0x1A02 (false)
SeqV2PTOV4$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x1A02 ENUM 0x1A03 (unknown), dchg
(unknown=0) 0x1A04 (forward),
0x1A05 (backward),
0x1A06 (both)
SeqV2PTOV4$ST$Op$general 0x1A03 BOOLEAN 0x1A07 (true), dchg
0x1A08 (false)
I2/I1>1 Broken Conductor(49)

Data Attribute db item Type Events Dataset
BC1PIOC5$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x1B00 INT32 0x1B00 (inc by 1) dchg
BC1PIOC5$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel Status-only ENUM
BC1PIOC5$ST$Str$general 0x1B01 BOOLEAN 0x1B01 (true), dchg
0x1B02 (false)
BC1PIOC5$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x1B02 ENUM 0x1B03 (unknown), dchg
(unknown=0) 0x1B04 (forward),
0x1B05 (backward),
0x1B06 (both)
BC1PIOC5$ST$Op$general 0x1B03 BOOLEAN 0x1B07 (true), dchg
0x1B08 (false)

BC2PIOC6$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x1C00 INT32 0x1C00 (inc by 1) dchg
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 173 of 335
ADR245B

BC2PIOC6$ST$Str$general 0x1C01 BOOLEAN 0x1C01 (true), 0x1C02 dchg
(false)
BC2PIOC6$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x1C02 ENUM 0x1C03 (unknown), dchg
(unknown=0) 0x1C04 (forward),
0x1C05 (backward),
0x1C06 (both)
BC2PIOC6$ST$Op$general 0x1C03 BOOLEAN 0x1C07 (true), 0x1C08 dchg
(false)

BC50PIOC7$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x1D00 INT32 0x1D00 (inc by 1) dchg
BC50PIOC7$ST$Str$general 0x1D01 BOOLEAN 0x1D01 (true), dchg
0x1D02 (false)
BC50PIOC7$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x1D02 ENUM 0x1D03 (unknown), dchg
(unknown=0) 0x1D04 (forward),
0x1D05 (backward),
0x1D06 (both)
BC50PIOC7$ST$Op$general 0x1D03 BOOLEAN 0x1D07 (true), dchg
0x1D08 (false)
ARR Auto-Recloser (79)

ARRRREC1$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x1000 INT32 0x1000 (inc by 1) dchg
ARRRREC1$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel Status-only ENUM
ARRRREC1$ST$Auto$stVal 0x1001 BOOLEAN 0x1001 (true), dchg
0x1002 (false)
ARRRREC1$ST$Op$general 0x1002 BOOLEAN 0x1003 (true), dchg
0x1004 (false)
ARRRREC1$ST$AutoRecSt$stVal 0x1003 ENUM 0x1005 (Ready), dchg
(Ready=1) 0x1006 (In Progress),
0x1007 (Successful)
TCS Trip Circuit Supervision

TCSGGIO3$ST$Alm$stVal 0x1100 BOOLEAN 0x1100 (true), dchg
0x1101 (false)
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 174 of 335
ADR245B
VTS Voltage Transformer Supervision

VTSGGIO4$ST$Alm$stVal 0x1E00 BOOLEAN 0x1E00 (true), dchg
0x1E01 (false)
CTS Voltage Transformer Supervision

CTSGGIO5$ST$Alm$stVal 0x1F00 BOOLEAN 0x1F00 (true), dchg
0x1F01 (false)
BF Breaker Failure
BFRBRF1$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x1200 INT32 0x1200 (inc by 1) dchg
BFRBRF1$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel Status-only ENUM
BFRBRF1$ST$Str$general 0x1201 BOOLEAN 0x1201 (true), dchg

0x1202 (false)
BFRBRF1$ST$Str$dirGeneral 0x1202 ENUM 0x1203 (unknown), dchg
0x1205 (backward),
0x1206 (both)
BFRBRF1$ST$OpEx$general 0x1203 BOOLEAN 0x1207 (true), dchg
0x1208 (false)
CB Circuit Breaker, T1 CB NO, T2 CB NC, Trip CB Open, Close CB Close

CBCSWI1$ST$Loc$stVal 0x1300 BOOLEAN 0x1300 (true), dchg
0x1301 (false)
CBCSWI1$ST$OpCntRs$stVal 0x1301 INT32 0x1302 (inc by 1) dchg

CBCSWI1$CF$OpCntRs$ctlModel Status-only ENUM
CBCSWI1$CO$Pos$Oper$ctlVal 0x1380 BOOLEAN

CBCSWI1$ST$Pos$stVal 0x1302 ENUM 0x1303 dchg
(intermediate- (intermediate-state),
state=0) 0x1304 (off),
0x1305 (on),
0x1306 (bad-state)
CBCSWI1$CF$Pos$ctlModel direct-with- ENUM
normal-
security
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 175 of 335
ADR245B
IN1-8 Binary Status Input 1-8

Data Attribute db item Type Events Dataset
SGGIO1$ST$Ind1$stVal 0x1400 BOOLEAN 0x1400 (true), dchg
0x1401 (false)

0x1403 (false)
0x1405 (false)
0x1407 (false)
0x1409 (false)
SGGIO1$ST$Ind6$stVal 0x1405 BOOLEAN 0x140A (true), dchg
0x140B (false)
SGGIO1$ST$Ind7$stVal 0x1406 BOOLEAN 0x140C (true), dchg
0x140D (false)
SGGIO1$ST$Ind8$stVal 0x1407 BOOLEAN 0x140E (true), dchg
0x140F (false)
OUT1-10 Binary Control Output 1-10

RLGGIO2$CO$SPCSO1$Oper$ctlVal 0x1580 BOOLEAN
RLGGIO2$ST$SPCSO1$stVal 0x1500 BOOLEAN 0x1500 (true), dchg
0x1501 (false)
RLGGIO2$CF$SPCSO1$ctlModel direct-with- ENUM

normal-
security
0x1503 (false)
normal-
security
0x1505 (false)
normal-
security
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 176 of 335
ADR245B

0x1507 (false)
normal-
security
0x1509 (false)
normal-
security
RLGGIO2$ST$SPCSO6$stVal 0x1505 BOOLEAN 0x150A (true), dchg
0x150B (false)
normal-
security
RLGGIO2$ST$SPCSO7$stVal 0x1506 BOOLEAN 0x150C (true), dchg
0x150D (false)
normal-
security
RLGGIO2$ST$SPCSO8$stVal 0x1507 BOOLEAN 0x150E (true), dchg
0x150F (false)
normal-
security
Relay Healthy
AshidaLPHD1$ST$PhyHealth$stVal 0x1600 ENUM 0x1600 (Ok), dchg
(Ok=1) 0x1601 (Warning),
0x1602 (Alarm)
Measurands
MMXU1$MX$TotW$mag$f 0x1700 FLOAT32 0x1700 dchg
MMXU1$MX$TotVAr$mag$f 0x1701 FLOAT32 0x1701 dchg
MMXU1$MX$TotVA$mag$f 0x1702 FLOAT32 0x1702 dchg
MMXU1$MX$TotPF$mag$f 0x1703 FLOAT32 0x1703 dchg
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 177 of 335
ADR245B
MMXU1$MX$Hz$mag$f 0x1704 FLOAT32 0x1704 dchg

MMXU1$MX$PPV$phsAB$cVal$mag$f 0x1705 FLOAT32 0x1705 dchg
MMXU1$MX$PPV$phsBC$cVal$mag$f 0x1706 FLOAT32 0x1706 dchg
MMXU1$MX$PPV$phsCA$cVal$mag$f 0x1707 FLOAT32 0x1707 dchg
MMXU1$MX$PhV$phsA$cVal$mag$f 0x1708 FLOAT32 0x1708 dchg
MMXU1$MX$PhV$phsB$cVal$mag$f 0x1709 FLOAT32 0x1709 dchg
MMXU1$MX$PhV$phsC$cVal$mag$f 0x170A FLOAT32 0x170A dchg
MMXU1$MX$A$phsA$cVal$mag$f 0x170B FLOAT32 0x170B dchg
MMXU1$MX$A$phsB$cVal$mag$f 0x170C FLOAT32 0x170C dchg
MMXU1$MX$A$phsC$cVal$mag$f 0x170D FLOAT32 0x170D dchg
MMXU1$MX$W$phsA$cVal$mag$f 0x170E FLOAT32 0x170E dchg
MMXU1$MX$W$phsB$cVal$mag$f 0x170F FLOAT32 0x170F dchg
MMXU1$MX$W$phsC$cVal$mag$f 0x1710 FLOAT32 0x1710 dchg
MMXU1$MX$VAr$phsA$cVal$mag$f 0x1711 FLOAT32 0x1711 dchg
MMXU1$MX$VAr$phsB$cVal$mag$f 0x1712 FLOAT32 0x1712 dchg
MMXU1$MX$VAr$phsC$cVal$mag$f 0x1713 FLOAT32 0x1713 dchg
MMXU1$MX$VA$phsA$cVal$mag$f 0x1714 FLOAT32 0x1714 dchg
MMXU1$MX$VA$phsB$cVal$mag$f 0x1715 FLOAT32 0x1715 dchg
MMXU1$MX$VA$phsC$cVal$mag$f 0x1716 FLOAT32 0x1716 dchg
MMXU1$MX$PF$phsA$cVal$mag$f 0x1717 FLOAT32 0x1717 dchg
MMXU1$MX$PF$phsB$cVal$mag$f 0x1718 FLOAT32 0x1718 dchg
MMXU1$MX$PF$phsC$cVal$mag$f 0x1719 FLOAT32 0x1719 dchg
Configuration
IP address 0x1800 INT32 (0 = DHCP)
Subnet mask 0x1801 INT32
Deafult gateway 0x1802 INT32
Primary SNTP server 0x1803 INT32
Secondary SNTP server 0x1804 INT32
LLN0$DC$NamPlt$swRev 0x1805 INT32
(HIWORD.LOWORD)
IEDName 0x1806-0x1810 string (0 terminated)
LDevice 0x1811-0x181B string (0 terminated)
LLN0$DC$NamPlt$d 0x181C-0x1826 string (0 terminated)
Configuration change 0x1800
Reset Digi 0x1801
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 178 of 335
ADR245B
LED reset
LLN0$CO$LEDRs$Oper$ctlVal 0x1980 BOOLEAN
LLN0$ST$LEDRs$stVal 0x1900 BOOLEAN 0x1900 (true), dchg
0x1901 (false)
LLN0$CF$LEDRs$ctlModel direct-with- ENUM
normal-
security
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 179 of 335
ADR245B
Section 8
User Guide
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/UG
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 181 of 335
ADR245B
Contents
8 USER GUIDE OVERVIEW 184
8.1 FRONT PANEL AND CONTROL 184
8.2 User interface 185
8.2.1 LCD Display 185
8.2.2 Touch Keys 185
8.2.3 LEDS 186
8.2.4 Communication ports 187
8.3 EDITING PASSWORD and SAVING the SETTINGS 187
8.4 MENUS 189
8.4.1 Default Display 189
8.4.2 Main Menu List 189
8.4.2.1 Main Menu List Details 190
8.7.1 To Set – General Settings 198
8.7.2 To View – General Settings 204
8.8 IP Configuration 205
8.9 Phase Overcurrent 208
8.10 Ground Overcurrent 214
8.11 Residual Overcurrent 218
8.12 Sequence Overcurrent 223
8.13 Under/Over Voltage 226
8.13.2 To View – Under/Over Overcurrent 228
8.14 Residual Over Voltage 229
8.14.1 To Set – Residual Over Voltage 229
8.14.2 To View – Residual Over Voltage 230
8.15 Sequence Over Voltage 231
8.15.1 To Set – Sequence Over Voltage 231
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 182 of 335
ADR245B
8.15.2 To View – Sequence Over Voltage 233

8.16 I2/I1 (46BC) 233
8.16.1 To Set – I2/I1 (46BC) 233
8.16.2 To View – I2/I1 (46BC) 235
8.17 I0/I1 (50BC) 236
8.17.1 To Set – I0/I1 (50BC) 236
8.17.2 To View – I0/I1 (50BC) 237
8.20 Reclosing 244
8.21 AProLogic 246
8.21.1.1 To Set –Sub menus List of OUTPUT, LED Green, LED Red and Boolean Logic 248
8.21.1.1.1 OUTPUT Contact Configurtion 248
8.21.1.1.2 LED Green Configurtion 248
8.21.1.1.3 LED Red Configurtion 248
8.21.1.1.4 Boolean Configurtion 248
8.21.1.2 List of the Sub menus of Status Configuration 251
8.22 Latch IO Setting 252
8.23 AndEq Time Setting 254
8.24 Fault 1 257
8.24.1 To view – Fault 1 257
8.25 Status 259
8.25.1 To view – Status 259
8.26 Error Log 260
8.26.1 To view – Error Log 260
8.27 Date / Time Settings 261
8.27.1 To Set – Date / Time Settings 261
8.27.2 To view –Date / Time Settings 263
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 183 of 335
ADR245B
8 USER GUIDE OVERVIEW
8.1 FRONT PANEL AND CONTROL

The HMI module is provided with 20x 4 LCD, 8 numbers of soft feather touch keys and There
are total 8 dual LED’s are provided on the Front Panel of the relay.
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Sr. No. Legend Function

GREEN LED – This LED is ON when the IED is in correct working order and should
be ON at all times.
1. ENABLED
RED LED – This LED is ON if the unit’s self-tests show there is an error in the
hardware.
GREEN LED – This LED flashes when the IED registers an alarm triggered by a
PROT. fault. The LED flashes until the alarms have been acknowledged by pressing VIEW
2.
START RECORD key, and then this LED is constantly ON. The LED switches OFF when the
TARGET RESET key is pressed.
PROT. RED LED – This LED switches ON when the IED issues a TRIP signal. It is cleared
3.
TRIP when the associated fault is cleared and TARGET RESET key is pressed.
PROT. RED LED – This LED flashes when the IEDs protection is out of service, all the
4.
OUT protection function will be blocked.
5. L5 Programmable Dual Colour LED
9. LCD To observe settings and parameters of the relay.

Display
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 184 of 335
ADR245B
10. EDIT Feather Touch Key to ‘EDIT’ the setting and also to CANCEL the changes done in
setting.
11. TARGET Feather Touch Key ‘TARGET RESET’ to clear the fault LED indications,
RESET clear the Alarms and ‘RESET’ the Relay Contacts.
12. READ Feather Touch Key ‘READ’ to view the Fault, Maintenance, Event and Alarm
Record.
13. PROT. Feather Touch Key for PROT. RESET is provided for Hardware Reset. This
RESET key is interlocked with EDIT key.
14. ◄ Left arrow Key [◄] for navigating through the menus and submenus &
Also to Save the Changes made in settings.
15. + /▲ Feather Touch Key [ + ] Plus to INCREMENT the values &
[▲] to SCROLL the Main Menu up.
16. - /▼ Feather Touch Key [ - ] Minus to 'DECREMENT' the values &
[▼] to SCROLL the Main Menu down.
17. ► Feather Touch Key [►] to VIEW the settings and to navigate through the menus and
submenus.
8.2 User interface
8.2.1 LCD Display

20x4 LCD with back lit is used as humans machine interface (HMI) for the followings:
• Display of relay type, ID and serial number
• Display of current software version
• Display of menu driven Protection Settings
• Display of online measurement of parameters
• Display of Date & Time.
• Display of Current status of all input.
• Display of Voltage status of all input.
• Display of fault data
• Display of Error Log for hardware and software faults
8.2.2 Touch Keys

The function of relay is controlled by the following keys provided on the Front Plate:
• EDIT: The EDIT key is used to activate the settings to be modified (To bring the
cursor). Also to CANCEL the changes done in setting.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 185 of 335
ADR245B
• “TARGET RESET’”. Feather Touch Key ‘TARGET RESET’ to clear the fault LED
indications, clear the Alarms and ‘RESET’ the Relay Contacts
• “READ” Feather Touch Key ‘READ’ to view the Fault, Maintenance, Event and
Alarm Record.
• PROT. RESET: Feather Touch Key for PROT. RESET is provided for Hardware
Reset. This key is interlocked with EDIT key..
• () Left Arrow: Left arrow Key () for navigating through the menus and submenus
& Also to SAVE the changes done in setting.
• (+ / ) Plus / Up Arrow: (+) Plus is used to increment the setting value in the display.
The () Up Arrow is used to scroll the menu in UP direction.
• (- / ) Minus / Down Arrow: (-) Minus is used to decrement the setting value in the
display. The () Down Arrow is used to scroll the menu in DOWN direction.
• () Right Arrow: The Right Arrow key is used to VIEW the settings and to navigate
through the menus and submenus.
Note: At the time of setting if changes are not carried within 100s then the display will reset itself and
return to the main menu.
8.2.3 LEDS
The following Table explains the assignment process to LED. Here G represents Green LED
and R Represent Red LED. Both are part of one command dual LED
Sr. LED Description
No. Default
Assignment
1 GREEN LED – This LED is ON when the IED is in correct working
L1- order and should be ON at all times.
ENABLED RED LED – This LED is ON if the unit’s self-tests show there is an
error in the hardware.
2 L2-PROT. RED LED – This LED flashes when the IED registers an alarm
START triggered by a fault. The LED flashes until the alarms have been
acknowledged by pressing VIEW RECORD key, and then this LED is
constantly ON. The LED switches OFF when the CLEAR key is
pressed.
3 L3- PROT RED LED – This LED switches ON when the IED issues a trip signal. It
TRIP is cleared when the associated fault is cleared and CLEAR key is
pressed.
4 L4- PROT. RED LED – This LED flashes when the IEDs protection is
OUT blocked.(Setting Error, ADC Error is detected by unit’s self-tests)
5 L5 User Programmable Dual Colour LED.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 186 of 335
ADR245B
8.2.4 Communication ports

1 USB port is provided at front side. It is used to retrieve Disturbance Records (last
200 faults); faults waveforms and parameterization using Relay Talk software.
2 RS485 (2 wire) port is provided at rear side and it is used for SCADA
communication
3 Relay is provided with open protocols like IEC60870-5-103 for external
communication.
8.3 EDITING PASSWORD and SAVING the SETTINGS

This is default window showing the online values of voltage
IAMAG= 0.00A
IBMAG= 0.00A
ICMAG= 0.00A Step 1 : Press the Left arrow key () the relay will display
INMAG= 0.00A Main Menu.
Step 2 : Using Plus / Up arrow Key (+ /) or Minus / Down

Measurement 1
arrow key (- /) key scroll the Main Menu / Group and select
Measurement 2
 General Settings  any setting that needs to be Edited. e.g. CB General Settings
IP Configuration
Step 3 : Press the Left arrow key () to move to the next
option. (To show New Password)
This window show the New Password

General Settings
New PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF  Step 4 : Press the LED Reset / Edit Key it will display the
Use Inr/Dec curser (  ) below the digits at Extreme Right. This curser (  )
can be shifted right to left and left to right using the left arrow
key () and Right Arrow key ().
[All Editable settings are password protected so when the EDIT

General Settings
key is pressed it will display the password and the settable
New PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF  Alpha / Numerical value will start blinking].
Use Inr/Dec Step 5: Enter the New password by using the Plus / Up arrow
key (+ /) or the Minus / Down arrow key (- /).
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 187 of 335
ADR245B
The Password is four (4) digits alpha numeric. i.e. 0000 – FFFF
Step 6: After editing the New Password, press the EDIT Key.
General Settings
New PassWord = 0000 Note: When the password is set, modification to the relay can
Range 0000 – FFFF  be done in any settings within 15 minutes. After the lapse of 15
Use Inr/Dec minutes, the relay will once again ask to restore the password.
Step 7 : Press the Press the Left arrow key () to move to the
next option. [Continue to press the Left arrow key () ] to
move to the SAVE Setting window.
Step 8: Press the Left arrow key () to SAVE the changes.
 For SAVE
LED RESET For CANCEL
This window will flash for a moment and the control will return
to the main menu.
SAVE Settings
Measurement 1
Measurement 2
 General Settings 
IP Configuration
Note: The user can CANEL (DISCARD) the settings by using the LED RESET Key.
Step 9: Press the LED RESET key to CANCEL the Changes.

(i.e. DISCARD Settings)
 For SAVE
This window will flash for a moment and the control will return
to the Main Menu.
DISCARD Settings
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 188 of 335
ADR245B
Measurement 1
Measurement 2
IP Configuration
8.4 MENUS
8.4.1 Default Display

After Power ON or when the HW RESET + LED RESET push button is pressed
simultaneously, the relay will display the following message.
This window will flash momentarily showing the following
Ashida Directional
3OC/1EF IDMT Relay Relay Type/Name : Ashida Directional 3OC/1EF IDMT Relay
ADR245B_V2_R3 Type ADR245B_V2_R3
V:03:00:07 ID :0001
SW = V03:00:07
ID = 0001
Then the control will go automatically to following window
This is default window showing the online parameter

IAMAG= 0.00A
IBMAG= 0.00A
ICMAG= 0.00A
INMAG= 0.00A
8.4.2 Main Menu List

This is default window showing the online parameter
IAMAG= 0.00A
IBMAG= 0.00A
Press the Left arrow key () the relay will display Main menu
ICMAG= 0.00A
as follows.
INMAG= 0.00A
Measurement 1, Measurement 2, General Settings, IP

Measurement 1 
Configuration, Phase Overcurrent, Ground Overcurrent,
Measurement 2
General Settings Residual Overcurrent, Sequence Overcurrent, Under/Over
IP Configuration Voltage, Residual Over Voltage, Sequence Over Voltage, I2/I1
Phase Overcurrent (46BC), I0/I1 (50BC), VT Supervision, CT Supervision,
Ground Overcurrent Reclosing, AProLogic, Latch I/O Settings, AndEq Time
Residual Overcurrent Settings, Fault 1, Fault 2, Fault 3, Fault 4, Fault 5, Fault 6 Fault
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 189 of 335
ADR245B
Sequence Over Current 7, Fault 8, Fault 9, Fault 10, Status, Error Log, Close, Trip,
Under/Over Voltage Active Group 1 and Date / Time these are the Main Menus
Residual Over Voltage available in this relay.
Sequence Over Voltage
I2/I1 (46BC) Since the LCD Display consist only of 4 Lines, the Main Menu
I0/I1 (50BC) list can be scrolled up or down by using the Up Arrow key ()
VT Supervision
or the Down Arrow key (). The arrow pointers suggest that
CT Supervision
particular Main Menu is selected.
Reclosing
AProLogic
Latch IO Settings
AndEq Time Settings
Fault 1
Fault 2
Fault 3
Fault 4
Fault 5
Fault 6
Fault 7
Fault 8
Fault 9
Fault 10
Status
Error Log
Close
Trip
Active Group : G1
Date / Time
8.4.2.1 Main Menu List Details
This menu is to view online value of voltage, current & its

parameter.
 MEASUREMENTS 1 
Press the Down arrow key () to move to the next option.

parameter.
 MEASUREMENTS 2 
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 190 of 335
ADR245B
Password protected window for “General Settings” setting.

i.e. New Password, Unit ID, Baud Rate, Com Port, Set Parity,
Frequency select, Active Group, 50 BF Enable, 50BF_I 50 BF
Delay, Ph CT Secondary, Ph CT Primary, EF CT Secondary,
EF CT Primary, VT Primary, VT Secondary, Local Control,
TCS, R Angle Offset, Y Angle Offset, B Angle Offset and Post
Trigger.
Password protected window for “IP Configuration setting i.e.

IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Pri. SNTP, Sec
IP Configuration 
SNTP, GMT and IED Name.
Password protected window for “Phase Overcurrent” setting

i.e. IP>1 Enable, IP>1, IP>1 TMS, IP>1 Curve, tIP>1 C6 DT,
 Phase Overcurrent 
IP>2 Enable, IP>2, IP>2 TMS, IP>2 Curve, tIP>2 C6 DT, IP>3
Enable, IP>3, IP>3 TMS, IP>3 Curve, tIP>3 C6 DT, IP>4
Enable, IP>4, tIP>4 DT and Phase MTA.
Password protected window for “Ground Overcurrent” setting

i.e. IE>1 Enable, IE>1, IE>1 TMS, IE>1 Curve, tIE>1 C6 DT,
 Ground Overcurrent 
IE>2 Enable, IE>2, IE>2 TMS, IE>2 Curve, tIE>2 C6 DT, IE>3
Enable, IE>3, IE>3 DT and Ground MTA.
Password protected window for “Residual Overcurrent”

setting i.e. 3Io>1 Enable, 3Io>1, 3Io>TMS, 3Io>Curve, t3Io>C6
 Residual Overcurrent 
DT, 3Io>2 Enable, 3Io>2, 3Io>2 TMS, 3Io>2 Curve, t3Io>2 C6
DT, 3Io>3 Enable, 3Io>3, t3Io>3 DT and 3Io> MTA.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 191 of 335
ADR245B
Password protected window for “Sequence Overcurrent”

setting i.e. Seq. I>1, Seq. I>1, Seq. I>1 TMS, Seq. I>1 Curve,
 Sequence Overcurrent 
tSeq. I>1 C6 DT, Seq. I>2 Enable, Seq. I/2 and Seq. I>2 DT.
Password protected window for “Under/Over Voltage” setting

i.e. Under Voltage, V<, tV<, Over Voltage, V> and tV>.
 Under/Over Voltage 
Password protected window for “Residual OverVoltage”

setting i.e. VN> Enable, VN> and tVN>.
 Residual OverVoltage 
Password protected window for “Sequence OverVoltage”

setting i.e. Seq. V>, Seq. V1>, tSeq. V>1, Seq. V>2 Enable,
 Sequence OverVoltage 
Seq. V2> and tSeq. V>2
Password protected window for “I2/I1 (46BC)” setting i.e.

I2/I1>1 OFF, I2/I1>1, tI2/I1>1, I2/I1>2 OFF, I2/I1>2 and
 I2/I1 (46BC) 
tI2/I1>2

I0/I1>1 OFF, I0/I1>1 and tI0/I1>1.
 I0/I1 (50BC) 
Password protected window for “VT Supervision” setting i.e.

VTS OFF, EXT VTS Ip, V1, V2, I1, I2, I0 and VTS Delay
 VT Supervision 
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 192 of 335
ADR245B
Password protected window for “CT Supervision” setting i.e.

CTS OFF, 37I<, I2/I1, I0/I1 V1>, V2<, V0< and CTS Delay.
 CT Supervision 
Password protected window for “Reclosing” setting i.e.

Reclosing, Dead Time 1, Dead Time 2, Dead Time 3, Dead
 Reclosing 
Time 4, and Reclaim Time.
Password protected window for “AproLogic” setting i.e. OUT,

LED G, LED R, Boolean Logic and Status.
 AproLogic 
Password protected window for “Latch IO Settings” setting

i.e. Lat Rly, Latch G LED and Latch R LED, .
 Latch IO Setting
Password protected window for “Latch IO Settings” EQA A

top, EQA A tres, EQA B top, EQA B tres, EQA C top, EQA C
 AndEq Time Setting
tres, EQA D top and EQA D tres,
This window is to view “FAULT 1”,
 Fault 1
 Fault 2
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 193 of 335
ADR245B
 Fault 3
 Fault 4
 Fault 5
 Fault 6
 Fault 7
 Fault 8
 Fault 1
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 194 of 335
ADR245B
 Fault 10
This window is to view “Status”,
 Status 
This window is to view “Error Log”,
 Error Log 
This window is to view “Close”,
 Close 
This window is to view “Active Group”,
 Active Group 1 
Password protected window for “DATE AND TIME’’ setting i.e.

SET Hours, SET Minutes, SET Seconds, SET Date, SET
DATE AND TIME 
Month and SET Year.
MEASUREMENTS 
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 195 of 335
ADR245B
8.5 Measurement 1
8.5.1 To View Measurement 1
 Measurement 1 
parameter.
Measurement 2
General Settings
Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
IP Configuration
This window shows the

IAMAG= 0.00A
IBMAG= 0.00A
ICMAG= 0.00A
INMAG= 0.00A

IaMAG= 0.000A
IbMAG= 0.000A
IcMAG= 0.000A
InMAG= 0.000A
This window shows

I1MAG= 0.000A
I2MAG= 0.000A
3I0MAG= 0.002A
VANMAG= 0.00kV

VBNMAG= 0.00kV
VCNMAG= 0.00kV
VNMAG= 0.00kV
VABMAG= 0.00kV

VBCMAG= 0.00kV
VCAMAG= 0.00kV
VanMAG= 0.002V
VbnMAG= 0.003V

VcnMAG= 0.003V
VnMAG= 0.003V
VabMAG= 0.000V
VbcMAG= 0.000V
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 196 of 335
ADR245B
This window shows the.

VcaMAG= 0.000V
V1MAG= 0.000A
Press the Right arrow key () to move to the Main Menu.
V2MAG= 0.000A
3V0MAG= 0.000A
Measurement 2
General Settings
IP Configuration
8.6 Measurement 2
8.6.1 To View Measurement 2
This menu is to view online value of power frequency, power
Measurement 1
factor & its parameter.
General Settings
IP Configuration Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.

PA=0.000MW
PB=0.000MW
PC=0.000MW Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
3P=0.000MW

QA=0.000MVAr
QB=0.000MVAr
QC=0.000MVAr Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
3Q=0.000MVAr
This window shows

SA=0.0000MVA
SB=0.0000MVA
SC=0.0000MVA Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
3S=0.0000MVA
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 197 of 335
ADR245B

FREQ=0.00Hz
PFA=0.000
PFB=0.000 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
PFC=0.000

3PF=0.000
Measurement 1
General Settings
IP Configuration
8.7 General Settings

8.7.1 To Set – General Settings
Password protected window for “General Settings” setting. i.e.

Measurement 1
New Password, Unit ID, Baud Rate, Com Port, Set Parity,
Measurement 2
 General Settings  Frequency, Active Group, 50 BF Enable, 50BF_I, 50 BF Delay,
IP Configuration Ph CT Secondary, Ph CT Primary, EF CT Secondary, EF CT

Primary, VT Primary, VT Secondary, Local Control, TCS, R
Angle Offset, Y Angle Offset, B Angle Offset and Post Trigger.
Press the Left arrow key () to move to the next option.
Editable setting
General Settings
PassWord = 0001 Enter the previously set password, by using the Plus / Up
Range 0000 – FFFF arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down arrow key (- /) As per
Editing Password setting.
Note : Default password setting is ‘0000’
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 198 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
General Settings
New PassWord = 0001 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
Range 0000 – FFFF arrow key (- /) the New PassWord can be set. As per Editing
Password setting.
Editable setting
General Settings
Unit ID = 001 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
Range 001 – 250 arrow key (- /) the Unit ID address can be set. The unit ID
can be set from 001 to 250 in step of 001, which means total
TH
250 devices can be connected to single computer. The 250
address is reserved for special command. These settings are
required to communicate with the SCADA computer.
Editable setting
General Settings
Baud Rate = 57600 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
Range 1200 – 57600 arrow key (- /) the Baud Rate can be selected. The settings
are from 1200 to 57600. (i.e. 1200, 2400, 9600, 19200, 38400
and 57600)
Editable setting
General Settings
Com Port = RS232 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
RS232/RS485 arrow key (- /) the Com Port can be selected. i.e. RS232 /
RS485
Editable setting
General Settings
Set Parity = None By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
None/Even/Odd arrow key (- /) the Set Parity can be selected. i.e.
None/Even/Odd.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 199 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
General Settings
Frequency = 50Hz By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
50Hz/6Hz arrow key (- /) the Frequency can be selected. i.e.
50Hz/60Hz
Editable setting
General Settings
Active Group = G1 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
G1/G2 arrow key (- /) the Active Group can be selected. i.e.
G1/G2
Editable setting
General Settings
50 BF = Byp By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
Int/Ext/Byp arrow key (- /) the 50 BF (Breaker Fail) can be selected. i.e.
Internal/External/Bypass. If set as Internal then BF relay is
enable and trigger internally and if set External then BF relay is
enable and trigger externally and if set bypass it will be disable.
Editable setting
General Settings
50 BF_I = 0070 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
10 – 200% arrow key (- /) the 50 BF_I (Breaker Fail) Trip Setting can be
set. The setting range is from 10% to 200% in step of 1% of
rated C.T. Secondary.
Editable setting
General Settings
50 BF Delay = 0200 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
100 – 2000ms arrow key (- /) 50 BF Delay (Breaker Fail delay for back-up
protection) can be set. The setting range is from 100 to
2000mSec in steps of 10mSec. The BF function is used for
back-up protection, when CB fails to trip even after relay gives
the trip command, the “50 BF Delay” is set to operate backup
protection.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 200 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
General Settings
Ph CT Secondary = 1A By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
1A/5A arrow key (- /) Ph CT Secondary can be selected. 1 Amp.
Or 5 Amp.
Note: Care should be taken to see proper connections are

established at the back terminal, i.e. between Com. and 1 while
selecting 1Amp and between Com. and 5 while selecting
5Amp.
Editable setting
General Settings
Ph CT Primary = 0100 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
10 – 5000A arrow key (- /) Ph CT Primary can be set. The setting range
is form 10 to 5000A in steps of 1A.
Editable setting
General Settings
EF CT Secondary = 1A By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
1A/5A arrow key (- /) EF CT Secondary can be selected. 1 Amp.
Or 5 Amp.
Note: Care should be taken to see proper connections are

established at the back terminal, i.e. between Com. and 1 while
selecting 1Amp and between Com. and 5 while selecting
5Amp.
Editable setting
General Settings
EF CT Primary = 0010 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
10 – 5000A arrow key (- /) EF CT Primary can be set. The setting range
is form 10 to 5000A in steps of 1A.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 201 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
General Settings
VT Primary = 001KV By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
1 – 400KV arrow key (- /) VT Primary can be set. The setting range is
form 1KV to 400KV in steps of 1KV.
Non-Editable setting
General Settings
VT Secondary = 63.5V By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
63.5V(Ln) arrow key (- /) VT Secondary can be set. The setting
63.5V(Ln) Fixed.
Editable setting
General Settings
Local Control = OFF By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/ON arrow key (- /) Local Control can be selected. i.e. YES/NO.
If set YES then the relay can be tripped manually by using
(TEST) key on the relay front panel, if it is set as NO then the
relay will not trip when the (TEST) key is pressed manually.
Editable setting
General Settings
TCS = OFF By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/ON arrow key (- /) TCS can be selected. i.e. YES/NO. If set YES
then Trip Circuit Supervision is enabled and if set NO then it
will be disabled
Editable setting
General Settings
R Angle Offset = 000 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
00 – 359 arrow key (- /) R Angle Offset can be set. The setting range
is form 00 to 359 in steps of 1.
Note: Its only for calibration at manufacturer side.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 202 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
General Settings
Y Angle Offset = 000 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
00 – 359 arrow key (- /) Y Angle Offset can be set. The setting range
Editable setting
General Settings
B Angle Offset = 000 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
00 – 359 arrow key (- /) B Angle Offset can be set. The setting range
Editable setting
General Settings
Post Trigger = 010 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
10% – 90% arrow key (- /) Post Trigger can be set. The setting range is
form 10% to 90% in steps of 1%.
Press the Left arrow key ()to SAVE the changes.
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
This window will flash for a moment and it will move to the
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
Measurement 1
Measurement 2
IP Configuration
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 203 of 335
ADR245B
8.7.2 To View – General Settings
Press the right arrow key () to move to the next option.
Measurement 1
Measurement 2
IP Configuration
This window shows the Unit ID, Baud Rate, Com Port and Set
Unit ID = 0001
Parity settings.
Baud Rate = 57600
Com Port = RS232
Set Parity = None Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
This window shows the Frequency, Active Group, 50BF and 50

Frequency = 50Hz
BF _I settings.
Active Group = G1
50 BF = Byp
50 BF_I = 0070 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
This window shows the 50BF Delay, Ph CT Secondary, Ph CT

50 BF Delay = 0200
Primary and EF CT Secondary settings.
Ph CT Secondary = 1A
Ph CT Primary = 0100
EF CT Secondary = 1A Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
This window shows the EF CT Primary, VT Primary, VT

EF CT Primary = 0010
Secondary and Local Control settings.
VT Primary = 001KV
VT Secondary = 63.5V
Local Control = OFF Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
This window shows the TCS, R Angle Offset, Y Angle Offset,

TCS = OFF
and B Angle Offset settings.
R Angle Offset = 0000
Y Angle Offset = 0000
B Angle Offset = 0000 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
This window shows the Post Trigger settings.

Post Trigger = 0010
Press the Right arrow key () to move to Main Menu
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 204 of 335
ADR245B
Measurement 1
Measurement 2
IP Configuration
8.8 IP Configuration
8.8.1 To Set – IP Configuration
Password protected window for “IP Configurtion” setting. i.e.

Measurement 2
IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Pri. SNTP, Sec
General Settings
IP Configuration  SNTP, GMT and IED Name.
Phase Overcurrent
Editable setting
IP Configuration
Editable setting
IP Configuration
IP Address = By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
192.168.001.100 arrow key (- /) the IP Address can be set in each of the
decimal section. The setting range is from 0 to 255. As per
Editable setting
IP Configuration
Subnet Mask = By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
255.255.255.000 arrow key (- /) the Subnet Mask can be set in each of the
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 205 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
IP Configuration
Default Gatway = By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
255.255.255.000 arrow key (- /) the Default Gateway can be set in each of
the decimal section. The setting range is from 0 to 255. As per
Editable setting
IP Configuration
Pri. SNTP = By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
000.000.000.000 arrow key (- /) the Pri. SNTP can be set in each of the
Editable setting
IP Configuration
Sec. SNTP = By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
000.000.000.000 arrow key (- /) the Sec. SNTP can be set in each of the
Editable setting
IP Configuration
GMT = By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
+ 05.30 arrow key (- /) the GMTcan be set in each of the decimal
section. The setting range is from 1 to 12 hours and 0 to 59
minutes both plus and minus.
Editable setting
IP Configuration
IED Name = By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
TEMPLATE arrow key (- /) the GIED Name can be set.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 206 of 335
ADR245B
Press the Left arrow key () to SAVE the changes.
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
Measurement 2
General Settings
Phase Overcurrent
8.8.2 To View – IP Configuration

Measurement 2
General Settings
Phase Overcurrent
This window shows the IP Address and Subnet Mask settings.

IP Address =
192.168.001.100
Subnet Mask = Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option
255.255.255.000
This window shows the Pri. SNTP and Sec. SNTP settings.
Pri. SNTP =
000.000.000.000
Sec SNTP = Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option
000.000.000.000
This window shows the Default Gateway and GMT settings.

Default Gateway =
000.000.000.000
GMT = Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option
+05.30
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 207 of 335
ADR245B
This window shows the IED Name settings.

IED Name =
TEMPLATE
Press the Right arrow key () to move to the Main Menu
Measurement 2
General Settings
Phase Overcurrent
8.9 Phase Overcurrent
8.9.1 To Set – Phase Overcurrent

Password protected window for “Phase Overcurrent” setting
General Settings
i.e. IP>1 Enable, IP>1, IP>1 TMS, IP>1 Curve, tIP>1 C6 DT,
IP Configuration
 Phase Overcurrent  IP>2 Enable, IP>2, IP>2 TMS, IP>2 Curve, tIP>2 C6 DT, IP>3
Ground Overcurrent Enable, IP>3, IP>3 TMS, IP>3 Curve, tIP>3 C6 DT, IP>4
Enable, IP>4, tIP>4 DT and Phase MTA.
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
IP>1 Enable = OFF By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDr/VC arrow key (- /) IP>1 Enable can be selected. i.e. OFF/+Dir/-
Dir/NDr/VC
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 208 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
IP>1 = 0010 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
10% – 250% arrow key (- /) IP>1 (IDMT/DMT Trip setting stage 1) can be
set. The setting range is from 10% to 250% in steps of 1%.
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
IP>1 TMS = 0.010 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0.010 – 1.000 arrow key (- /) IP>1 TMS (IDMT Time multiply setting stage
1) can be set. The setting range is from 0.010 to 1.000 in steps
of 0.005
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
IP>1 Curve = 0001 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
C1 – C6 arrow key (- /) the desired IP>1 Curve (IDMT/DMT Curve
selection stage 1) can be selected. Six different types of curves
are provided C1 to C6. When the given value is 0001 curve 1 is
selected and when the given value 0002 curve 2 is selected.
In similar manner any desired curve can be selected as 0001

to 0006 correspond respectively with C1 to C6.
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
tIP>1 C6 DT = 0000.1 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 1899.9s arrow key (- /) the desired tIP>1 C6 DT (DMT Definite Time
selection stage 1) can be set. The setting range is from 0 (Inst)
to 1899.9secs in steps of 0.1sec.
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
Dir/NDr/VC
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 209 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
2) can be set. The setting range is from 0.010 to 1.00. in steps
of 0.005
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1

Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 210 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
Dir/NDr/VC
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
of 0.005
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1

Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 211 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir arrow key (- /) IP>4Enable can be selected. i.e. OFF/+Dir/-
Dir/NDir
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
tIP>4 DT = 00.05 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
Editable setting
Phase O/C G1
Phase MTA = 0000 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 360Lead arrow key (- /) the desired Phase MTA (Maximum Torque
Angle) can be set. The setting range is 0 – 360 degree Lead in
steps of 5 degree.
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 212 of 335
ADR245B
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
General Settings
IP Configuration
Ground Overcurrent
8.9.2 To View – Phase Overcurrent

General Settings
IP Configuration
Ground Overcurrent
This window shows the IP>1 settings.

IP>1= OFF IP>1=0010
IP>1 TMS = 0.010
IP>1 Curve = 0001 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
tIP>1 C6 DT = 0000.1

IP>2= OFF IP>2=0010
IP>2 TMS = 0.010
tIP>2 C6 DT = 0000.1

IP>3= OFF IP>3=0010
IP>3 TMS = 0.010
tIP>3 C6 DT = 0000.0

IP>4 = OFF
IP>4 = 0100
tIP>4 DT = 00.05 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the Main Menu.
Phase MTA = 000
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 213 of 335
ADR245B
General Settings
.
IP Configuration
Ground Overcurrent
8.10 Ground Overcurrent

8.10.1 To Set – Ground Overcurrent
Password protected window for “Ground Overcurrent” setting
IP Configuration
i.e. IE>1 Enable, IE>1, IE>1 TMS, IE>1 Curve, tIE>1 C6 DT,
Phase Overcurrent
Ground Overcurrent  IE>2 Enable, IE>2, IE>2 TMS, IE>2 Curve, tIE>2 C6 DT, IE>3
Residual Overcurrent Enable, IE>3, tIE>3 DT and Ground MTA.
Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
IE>1 Enable = OFF By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir arrow key (- /) IE>1 Enable can be selected. i.e. OFF/+Dir/-
Dir/NDir
Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
IE>1 = 0020 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
5% – 80% arrow key (- /) IE>1 (IDMT/DMT Trip setting stage 1) can be
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 214 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
IE>1 TMS = 0.010 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0.010 – 1.000 arrow key (- /) IE>1 TMS (IDMT Time multiply setting stage
of 0.005
Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
IE>1 Curve = 0001 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
C1 – C6 arrow key (- /) the desired IE>1 Curve (IDMT/DMT Curve

Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
tIE>1 C6 DT = 000.1 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 99.9s arrow key (- /) the desired tIE>1 C6 DT (DMT Definite Time
Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
Dir/NDir
Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 215 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
IE>2 TMS = 0.010 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0.010 – 1.000 arrow key (- /) IE>2 TMS (IDMT Time multiply setting stage
2) can be set. The setting range is from 0.010 to 1.00. in steps
of 0.005
Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
IE>2 Curve = 0001 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
C1 – C6 arrow key (- /) the desired IE>2 Curve (IDMT/DMT Curve

Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
tIE>2 C6 DT = 000.1 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 99.9s arrow key (- /) the desired tIE>2 C6 DT (DMT Definite Time
Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
Dir/NDir
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 216 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
tIE>3 DT = 00.05 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 3.00s arrow key (- /) the desired tE>3 DT (DMT Definite Time
Editable setting
Ground O/C G1
Ground MTA = 0000 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 360Lag arrow key (- /) the desired Ground MTA (Maximum Torque
Angle) can be set. The setting range is 0 – 360 degree Lag in
steps of 5 degree.
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
IP Configuration
Phase Overcurrent
Ground Overcurrent 
Residual Overcurrent
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 217 of 335
ADR245B
8.10.2 To View – Ground Overcurrent

IP Configuration
Phase Overcurrent
This window shows the IE>1 settings.

IE>1= OFF IE>1=0020
IE>1 TMS = 0.010
IE>1 Curve = 0001 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
tIE>1 C6 DT = 000.1

IE>2= OFF IE>2=0020
IE>2 TMS = 0.010
IE>2 Curve = 0001 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
tIE>2 C6 DT = 000.1

IE>3 = OFF
IE>3 = 0100
tIE>3 DT = 00.05 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the Main Menu.
Ground MTA = 000
IP Configuration
.
Phase Overcurrent
8.11 Residual Overcurrent
8.11.1 To Set – Residual Overcurrent

Password protected window for “Residual Overcurrent”
Phase Overcurrent
setting i.e. 3Io>1 Enable, 3Io>1, 3Io>1 TMS, 3Io>1 Curve,
Ground Overcurrent
 Residual Overcurrent  t3Io>1 C6 DT, 3Io>2 Enable, 3Io>2, 3Io>2 TMS, 3Io>2 Curve,
Sequence Overcurrent t3Io>2 C6 DT, 3Io>3 Enable, 3Io>3, t3Io>3 DT and 3Io MTA.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 218 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
3Io>1 Enable = OFF By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir arrow key (- /) 3Io>1 Enable can be selected. i.e. OFF/+Dir/-
Dir/NDir
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
3Io>1 = 0010 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
10% – 250% arrow key (- /) 3Io>1 (IDMT/DMT Trip setting stage 1) can be
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
3Io>1 TMS = 0.010 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0.010 – 1.000 arrow key (- /) 3Io>1 TMS (IDMT Time multiply setting stage
of 0.005
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
3Io>1 Curve = 0001 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
C1 – C6 arrow key (- /) the desired 3Io>1 Curve (IDMT/DMT Curve

Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 219 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
t3Io>1 C6 DT = 000.1 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 99.9s arrow key (- /) the desired t3Io>1 C6 DT (DMT Definite Time
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
Dir/NDir
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
3Io>2 TMS = 0.010 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0.010 – 1.000 arrow key (- /) 3Io>2 TMS (IDMT Time multiply setting stage
of 0.005
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
3Io>2 Curve = 0001 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
C1 – C6 arrow key (- /) the desired 3Io>2 Curve (IDMT/DMT Curve

Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 220 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
t3Io>2 C6 DT = 000.1 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 99.9s arrow key (- /) the desired t3Io>2 C6 DT (DMT Definite Time
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
Dir/NDir
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
t3Io>3 DT = 00.05 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 3.00s arrow key (- /) the desired t3Io>3 DT (DMT Definite Time
Editable setting
Residual O/C G1
3Io MTA = 0000 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 360Lag arrow key (- /) the desired 3Io MTA (Maximum Torque
Angle) can be set. The setting range is 0 – 360 degree Lag in
steps of 5 degree.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 221 of 335
ADR245B
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
Phase Overcurrent
Ground Overcurrent
Sequence Overcurrent
8.11.2 To View – Residual Overcurrent

Phase Overcurrent
Ground Overcurrent
This window shows the 3Io>1 settings.

3Io>1= OFF 3Io>1=0020
3Io>1 TMS = 0.010
3Io>1 Curve = 0001 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
t3Io>1 C6 DT = 000.1

3Io>2= OFF
3Io>2= 0010
3Io>2 TMS = 0.010 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
3Io>2 C6 DT = 000.1
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 222 of 335
ADR245B

3Io>3 = OFF
3Io>3 = 0100
3Io>3 DT = 00.05 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the Main Menu.
3Io MTA = 000
Phase Overcurrent
.
Ground Overcurrent
8.12 Sequence Overcurrent
8.12.1 To Set – Sequence Overcurrent

Password protected window for “Sequence Overcurrent”
Ground Overcurrent
setting i.e. Seq.I>1 Enable, Seq.I>1, Seq.I>1 TMS, Seq.I>1
Sequence Overcurrent  Curve, tSeq.I>1 C6 DT, Seq.I>2 Enable, Seq.I>2 and tSeq.I>2
Under/Over Voltage DT,
Editable setting
Sequence O/C G1
Editable setting
Sequence O/C G1
Seq.I>1 = +Seq By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/+Seq/-Seq arrow key (- /) Seq.I>1 Enable can be selected. i.e.
OFF/+Seq/-Seq.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 223 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Sequence O/C G1
Seq.I>1 = 0020 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
10% – 100% arrow key (- /) Seq.I>1 (IDMT/DMT Trip setting stage 1) can
be set. The setting range is from 10% to 100% in steps of 1%.
Editable setting
Sequence O/C G1
Seq.I>1 TMS = 0.010 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0.010 – 1.000 arrow key (- /) Seq.I>1 TMS (IDMT Time multiply setting
stage 1) can be set. The setting range is from 0.010 to 1.000 in
steps of 0.005
Editable setting
Sequence O/C G1
Seq.I>1 Curve = 0001 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
C1 – C6 arrow key (- /) the desired Seq.I>1 Curve (IDMT/DMT Curve

Editable setting
Sequence O/C G1
tSeq.I>1 C6 DT = 000.1 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 99.9s arrow key (- /) the desired tSeq.I>1 C6 DT (DMT Definite
Time selection stage 1) can be set. The setting range is from 0
(Inst) to 99.9secs in steps of 0.1sec.
Editable setting
Sequence O/C G1
Seq.I>2 = +Seq By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/+Seq/-Seq arrow key (- /) Seq.I>2 Enable can be selected. i.e.
OFF/+Seq/-Seq.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 224 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Sequence O/C G1
Seq.I>2 = 0100 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
50% – 1500% arrow key (- /) Seq.I>2 (IDMT/DMT Trip setting stage 2) can
be set. The setting range is from 50% to 1500% in steps of
10%.
Editable setting
Sequence O/C G1
Seq.I>2 DT = 00.05 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 3.00s arrow key (- /) the desired Seq.I>2 DT (DMT Definite Time
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
Ground Overcurrent
Sequence Overcurrent 
Under/Over Voltage
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 225 of 335
ADR245B
8.12.2 To View – Sequence Overcurrent

Ground Overcurrent
Under/Over Voltage
This window shows the Seq.I>1 settings.

Seq.I>1 = +Seq
Seq.I>1 = 020
Seq.I>1 TMS = 0.010 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
Seq.I>1 Curve = 001
This window shows the Seq.I>1 and Seq.I>2 settings.

tSeq.I>1 C6 DT = 00.1
Seq.I>2 = +Seq
Seq.I>2 = 0100 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
Seq.I>2 DT = 0.05
Ground Overcurrent
.
Under/Over Voltage
8.13 Under/Over Voltage
8.13.1 To Set – Under/Over Voltage

Password protected window for “Under/Over Voltage” setting
i.e. Under Voltage, V<, tV<, Over Voltage, V> and tV>.
Under/Over Voltage 
Residual Over Voltage Press the Left arrow key () to move to the next option.
Editable setting
Under/Over Voltage G1
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 226 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Under Voltage = ON By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/ON/AND/+SEQ arrow key (- /) Under Voltage Enable can be selected. i.e.
OFF/ON/AND/SEQ
Editable setting
V< = 0045 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
25% – 95% arrow key (- /) V< can be set. The setting range is from 25%
to 95% in steps of 1%.
Editable setting
Under/Over O/C G1
tV< = 010.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 99.9s arrow key (- /) the desired tV< can be set. The setting range
is from 0 (Inst) to 99.9secs in steps of 0.1sec.
Editable setting
Over Voltage = ON By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/ON/AND arrow key (- /) Over Voltage Enable can be selected. i.e.
OFF/ON/AND
Editable setting
V> = 0110 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
105% – 155% arrow key (- /) V> can be set. The setting range is from
105% to 155% in steps of 1%.
Editable setting
Under/Over O/C G1
tV> = 000.1 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 99.0s arrow key (- /) the desired tV> can be set. The setting range
is from 0 (Inst) to 99.0secs in steps of 0.1sec.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 227 of 335
ADR245B
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
Residual Over Voltage
8.13.2 To View – Under/Over Overcurrent

This window shows the Under Voltage settings.

Under Voltage = ON
V< = 045%
tV< = 10.0s Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
This window shows the Over Voltage settings.

Over Voltage = ON
V> = 0110%
tV> = 010.0s Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 228 of 335
ADR245B
.
8.14 Residual Over Voltage
8.14.1 To Set – Residual Over Voltage

Password protected window for “Residual Over Voltage”
setting i.e. VN OFF, VN> and tVN>.
Under/Over Voltage
Residual Over Voltage 
Sequence Over Voltage Press the Left arrow key () to move to the next option.
Editable setting
Residual O/V G1
Editable setting
Residual O/V G1
VN = OFF By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/Measured/Derived arrow key (- /) VN Enable can be selected. i.e.
OFF/Measured/Derived.
Editable setting
Residual O/V G1
VN> = 010.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
10.0 – 100.0V arrow key (- /) VN> can be set. The setting range is from 10V
to 100.0V in steps of 0.1V
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 229 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Residual O/V G1
tVN> = 001.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0.0 – 99.0s arrow key (- /) the desired tVN> can be set. The setting
range is from 0 (Inst) to 99.0secs in steps of 0.1sec.
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
Under/Over Voltage
8.14.2 To View – Residual Over Voltage

Under/Over Voltage
This window shows the Residual Over Voltage settings.

VN> = OFF
VN> = 010.0v
tVN> = 010.0s Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 230 of 335
ADR245B
.
Under/Over Voltage
8.15 Sequence Over Voltage
8.15.1 To Set – Sequence Over Voltage

Password protected window for “Sequence Over Voltage”
Under/Over Voltage
setting i.e. Seq.V>1 OFF, Seq>1, tSeq.V>1. Seq.V>2 OFF,
Sequence Over Voltage Seq>2 and tSeq.V>2.
I2/I1 (46BC)
Editable setting
Sequence O/V G1
Editable setting
Sequence O/V G1
Seq.V>1 = OFF By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/+Seq/-Seq arrow key (- /) Seq.V>1 Enable can be selected. i.e.
OFF/+Seq/-Seq.
Editable setting
Sequence O/V G1
Seq.V>1 = 010.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
5.0 – 100.0V arrow key (- /) Seq.V>1 can be set. The setting range is from
5V to 100.0V in steps of 0.1V
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 231 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Sequence O/V G1
tSeq.V>1 = 01.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 99.0s arrow key (- /) the desired tSeq.V>1 can be set. The setting
Editable setting
Sequence O/V G1
Seq.V>2 = OFF By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/+Seq/-Seq arrow key (- /) Seq.V>2 Enable can be selected. i.e.
OFF/+Seq/-Seq.
Editable setting
Sequence O/V G1
Seq.V>2 = 010.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
5.0 – 100.0V arrow key (- /) Seq.V>2 can be set. The setting range is from
5V to 100.0V in steps of 0.1V
Editable setting
Sequence O/V G1
tSeq.V>2 = 01.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 99.0s arrow key (- /) the desired tSeq.V>2 can be set. The setting
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 232 of 335
ADR245B
Under/Over Voltage
Sequence Over Voltage
I2/I1 (46BC)
8.15.2 To View – Sequence Over Voltage

Under/Over Voltage
I2/I1 (46BC)
This window shows the Seq. V>1 settings.

Seq.V>1 = OFF
Seq.V>1 = 010.0v
tSeq.V>1 = 59.9s Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
This window shows the Seq. V>2 settings.

Seq.V>2 = OFF
Seq.V>2 = 010.0v
tSeq.V>2 = 59.9s Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
Under/Over Voltage
.
I2/I1 (46BC)
8.16 I2/I1 (46BC)
8.16.1 To Set – I2/I1 (46BC)

I2/I1>1 OFF, I2/I1>1, tI2/I1>1, I2/I1>2 OFF, I2/I1>2 and
I2/I1 (46BC)  tI2/I1>2.
I0/I1 (50BC)
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 233 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
I2/I1 (46BC) G1
Editable setting
I2/I1 (46BC) G1
I2/I1>1 = OFF By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/ON/&I2/&50BC arrow key (- /) I2/I1>1 can be selected. i.e.
OFF/ON/&I2/&50BC
Editable setting
I2/I1 (46BC) G1
I2/I1>1 = 1.00 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0.1 – 1.00Pu arrow key (- /) I2/I1>1 can be set. The setting range is from
0.10Pu to 1.00Pu in steps of 0.01Pu
Editable setting
I2/I1 (46BC) G1
tI2/I1>1 = 10.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 99.0s arrow key (- /) the desired tI2/I1>1 can be set. The setting
Editable setting
I2/I1 (46BC) G1
OFF/ON arrow key (- /) I2/I1>2 can be selected. i.e. OFF/ON
Editable setting
I2/I1 (46BC) G1
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 234 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
I2/I1 (46BC) G1
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings

I2/I1 (46BC) 
I0/I1 (50BC)
8.16.2 To View – I2/I1 (46BC)

I2/I1 (46BC) 
I0/I1 (50BC)
This window shows the I2/I1>1 settings.

I2/I1>1 = OFF
I2/I1>1 = 1.00Pu
tI2/I1>1 = 10.0s Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 235 of 335
ADR245B

I2/I1>2 = OFF
I2/I1>2 = 1.00Pu

.
I2/I1 (46BC) 
I0/I1 (50BC)
8.17 I0/I1 (50BC)
8.17.1 To Set – I0/I1 (50BC)

I0/I1>1 OFF, I0/I1>1 and tI0/I1>1.
I2/I1 (46BC)
I0/I1 (50BC) 
VT Supervision Press the Left arrow key () to move to the next option.
Editable setting
I0/I1 (50BC) G1
Editable setting
I0/I1 (50BC) G1
OFF/ON arrow key (- /) I2/I1>1 can be selected. i.e. OFF/ON.
Editable setting
I0/I1 (50BC) G1
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 236 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
I0/I1 (50BC) G1
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings

I2/I1 (46BC)
I0/I1 (50BC) 
VT Supervision
8.17.2 To View – I0/I1 (50BC)

I2/I1 (46BC)
I0/I1 (50BC) 
VT Supervision

I0/I1>1 = OFF
I0/I1>1 = 1.00Pu
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 237 of 335
ADR245B

.
I2/I1 (46BC)
I0/I1 (50BC) 
VT Supervision
8.18 VT Supervision
8.18.1 To Set – VT Supervision

Password protected window for “VT Supervision” setting i.e.
I2/I1 (46BC)
VTS OFF, EXT VTS Ip, V1 , V2, I1, I2, I0 and VTS Delay.
I0/I1 (50BC)
VT Supervision 
CT Supervision Press the Left arrow key () to move to the next option.
Editable setting
VT Supervision
Editable setting
VT Supervision
VTS = OFF By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/Int/Ext arrow key (- /) VTS can be selected. i.e. OFF/Int./Ext.
Editable setting
VT Supervision
EXT VTS Ip = 1>0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
1>0 / 0>1 arrow key (- /) EXT VTS Ip can be set. i.e. 1>0 / 0>1
Editable setting
VT Supervision
V1 = 010 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
5 – 60V arrow key (- /) the desired V1 can be set. The setting range
is from 5 to 60V in steps of 1V.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 238 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
VT Supervision
V2 = 010 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
5 – 40V arrow key (- /) the desired V2 can be set. The setting range
Editable setting
VT Supervision
I1 = 010 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
5 – 200% arrow key (- /) the desired I1 can be set. The setting range is
from 5 to 200% in steps of 1%.
Editable setting
VT Supervision
Editable setting
VT Supervision
Editable setting
VT Supervision
VTS Delay = 00.01 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0.00 – 10.00s arrow key (- /) the desired VTS Delay can be set. The setting
range is from 0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 239 of 335
ADR245B
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
I2/I1 (46BC)
I0/I1 (50BC)
CT Supervision
8.18.2 To View – VT Supervision

I2/I1 (46BC)
I0/I1 (50BC)
CT Supervision
This window shows the VT Supervision settings.

VTS = OFF
EXT VTS Ip = 1>0
V1 = 010V Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
V2 = 010V
This window shows the VT Supervision settings.

I1 = 010%
I2 = 050%
I0 = 020% Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
VTS Delay = 00.01s
I2/I1 (46BC)
I0/I1 (50BC)
CT Supervision
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 240 of 335
ADR245B
8.19 CT Supervision
8.19.1 To Set – CT Supervision

Password protected window for “CT Supervision” setting i.e.
I0/I1 (50BC)
CTS OFF, 37I<, I2/I1>, I0/I1>, V1>, V2<, V0< and CTS Delay.
VT Supervision
Reclosing Press the Left arrow key () to move to the next option.
Editable setting
CT Supervision
Editable setting
CT Supervision
CTS = OFF By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
OFF/ON arrow key (- /) CTS can be selected. i.e. OFF/ON.
Editable setting
CT Supervision
37I< = 0.00 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0.05 to 1.5 Pu arrow key (- /) 37I< can be set. The setting range is from
0.05 to 1.5Pu in steps of 0.05Pu
Editable setting
CT Supervision
I2/I1 > = 0.50 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0.05 to 1Pu arrow key (- /) I2/I1> can be set. The setting range is from
0.05 to 1Pu in steps of 0.01Pu
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 241 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
CT Supervision
I0/I1> = 0.10 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0.05 to 1Pu arrow key (- /) I0/I1> can be set. The setting range is from
0.05 to 1Pu in steps of 0.01Pu
Editable setting
CT Supervision
V1> = 10.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
5 – 100V arrow key (- /) the desired V1> can be set. The setting range
Editable setting
CT Supervision
V2< = 10.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
5 – 100V arrow key (- /) the desired V2< can be set. The setting range
Editable setting
CT Supervision
V0< = 10.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
5 – 100V arrow key (- /) the desired V0< can be set. The setting range
Editable setting
CT Supervision
CTS Delay = 00.00 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0.00 – 10.00s arrow key (- /) the desired CTS Delay can be set. The setting
range is from 0.00 to 10.00s in steps of 0.01s.
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 242 of 335
ADR245B
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
I0/I1 (50BC)
VT Supervision
Reclosing
8.19.2 To View – CT Supervision

I0/I1 (50BC)
VT Supervision
Reclosing
This window shows the CT Supervision settings.

CTS = OFF
37I< = 1.50Pu
I2/I1> = 0.50Pu Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
I0/I1> = 0.10Pu
This window shows the CT Supervision settings.

V1> = 010V
V2< = 020V
V0< = 020V Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
CTS Delay = 00.00s
I0/I1 (50BC)
VT Supervision
Reclosing
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 243 of 335
ADR245B
8.20 Reclosing
8.20.1 To Set – Reclosing

Password protected window for “Reclosing” setting i.e.
VT Supervision
Reclosing OFF, Dead Time 1, Dead Time 2, Dead Time 3,
CT Supervision
Reclosing  Dead Time 4 and Reclaim Time.
AproLogic
Editable setting
Reclosing
Editable setting
Reclosing
Reclosing = OFF By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0–4 arrow key (- /) Reclosing can be selected. The setting range
is form OFF, 0 to 4. If it is set OFF, then Reclose setting is
disabled.
Editable setting
Reclosing
Dead Time 1 = 001.00 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0.10 – 180.00s arrow key (- /) Dead Time 1 can be selected. The setting
range is from 0.10 to 180.00secs in steps of 0.10secs.
Editable setting
Reclosing
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 244 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Reclosing
Editable setting
Reclosing
Editable setting
Reclosing
Reclaim Time = 200.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
10.0 – 300.0s arrow key (- /) Reclaim Time can be set. The setting range
is from 10.0 to 300.0secs in steps of 1secs.
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
VT Supervision
CT Supervision
Reclosing 
AproLogic
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 245 of 335
ADR245B
8.20.2 To View – Reclosing

VT Supervision
CT Supervision
Reclosing 
AproLogic
This window shows the Reclosing settings.

Reclosing = OFF
Dead Time 1 = 001.00s
Dead Time 2 = 001.00s Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
This window shows the Reclosing settings.

Reclaim Time = 0200.0s
VT Supervision
CT Supervision
Reclosing 
AproLogic
8.21 AProLogic
8.21.1 To Set – AProLogic

Password protected window for “AProLogic” setting i.e. OUT,
CT Supervision
LED G, LED R, Boolean Logic and Status.
Reclosing
AproLogic 
Latch IO Setting Press the Left arrow key () to move to the next option.
Editable setting
AProLogic
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 246 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
OUT = BA987654321
PhaseA>1T = 00000000000 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
arrow key (- /) Output can be selected. i.e. 0 or 1 (0 means
not assigned and 1 means assigned.)
Editable setting
LED G = 8765432
arrow key (- /) LED G can be selected. i.e. 0 or 1 (0 means
Editable setting
LED R = 8765432
arrow key (- /) LED R can be selected. i.e. 0 or 1 (0 means
Editable setting
Boolean Logic = DCBA
arrow key (- /) Boolean Logic can be selected. i.e. 0 or 1 (0
means not assigned and 1 means assigned.)
Editable setting
Status = A9876543321
None = 0000000000 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
arrow key (- /) Status can be selected. i.e. 0 or 1 (0 means
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 247 of 335
ADR245B
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
CT Supervision
Reclosing
AproLogic 
Latch IO Setting
8.21.1.1 To Set –Sub menus List of OUTPUT, LED Green, LED Red and Boolean Logic
8.21.1.1.1 OUTPUT Contact Configurtion
OUTPUT contacts can be assigned by selecting any function given in the sub menus. There
are in all 11 No’s of Relays i.e. OUT 1 to OUT B [1 corresponds to OUT 1, 2 corresponds to
OUT 2 in their respectively manner and 9 corresponds to OUT 9, A corresponds to OUT A
and B corresponds to OUT B].
8.21.1.1.2 LED Green Configurtion
LED G (Green) can be assigned by selecting any function given in the sub menus. There are
in all 7 No’s of LEDs L2 to L8 i.e. 2 corresponds to L2, 3 corresponds to L3, in their
respectively manner and 8 corresponds to L8
8.21.1.1.3 LED Red Configurtion
LED R (Red) can be assigned by selecting any function given in the sub menus. There are in
all 7 No’s of LEDs L2 to L8 i.e. 2 corresponds to L2, 3 corresponds to L3, in their respectively
manner and 8 corresponds to L8
8.21.1.1.4 Boolean Configurtion
Boolean Logic can be assigned by selecting any function given in the sub menus. There are
in all 4 Nos of Boolean Logic and they are A, B, C & D.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 248 of 335
ADR245B
The functions assigned to Relay, LED G, LED R and AND Logic are listed below.
Sr. No Function Description
1. PhaseA>1T A Phase Fault Trip on first stage
2. PhaseB>1T B Phase Fault Trip on first stage
3. PhaseC>1T C Phase Fault Trip on first stage
4. PhaseA>2T A Phase Fault Trip on Second stage
5. PhaseB>2T B Phase Fault Trip on Second stage
6. PhaseC>2T C Phase Fault Trip on Second stage
7. PhaseA>3T A Phase Fault Trip on third stage
8. PhaseB>3T B Phase Fault Trip on third stage
9. PhaseC>3T C Phase Fault Trip on third stage
10. PhaseA>4T A Phase Fault Trip on forth stage
11. PhaseB>4T B Phase Fault Trip on forth stage
12. PhaseC>4T C Phase Fault Trip on forth stage
13. PhaseA>1P A Phase Fault Pickup on first stage
14. PhaseB>1P B Phase Fault Pickup on first stage
15. PhaseC>1P C Phase Fault Pickup on first stage
16. PhaseA>2P A Phase Fault Pickup on Second stage
17. PhaseB>2P B Phase Fault Pickup on Second stage
18. PhaseC>2P C Phase Fault Pickup on Second stage
19. PhaseA>3P A Phase Fault Pickup on third stage
20. PhaseB>3P B Phase Fault Pickup on third stage
21. PhaseC>3P C Phase Fault Pickup on third stage
22. PhaseA>4P A Phase Fault Pickup on forth stage
23. PhaseB>4P B Phase Fault Pickup on forth stage
24. PhaseC>4P C Phase Fault Pickup on forth stage
25. GND IE>1T Ground Fault trip on first stage
26. GND IE>2T Ground Fault trip on second stage
27. GND IE>3T Ground Fault trip on third stage
28. GND IE>1P Ground Fault pickup on first stage
29. GND IE>2P Ground Fault pickup on second stage
30. GND IE>3P Ground Fault pickup on third stage
31. 3Io>1T Residual over current trip on first stage
32. 3Io >2T Residual over current trip on second stage
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 249 of 335
ADR245B

33. 3Io >3T Residual over current trip on third stage
34. 3Io >1P Residual over current pickup on first stage
35. 3Io >2P Residual over current pickup on second stage
36. 3Io >3P Residual over current pickup on third stage
37. Seq I>1 T Sequential over current trip on first stage
38. Seq I>2 T Sequential over current trip on second stage
39. Seq I>1 P Sequential over current pickup on first stage
40. Seq I>2 P Sequential over current pickup on second stage
41. V>P Over Voltage Pickup
42. V>T Over Voltage Trip
43. V<P Under Voltage Pickup
44. V<T Under Voltage Trip
45. NO VOLT No Voltage
46. VN>T Ground Over Voltage Trip
47. VN>P Ground Over Voltage Pickup
48. 50BF Breaker Fail
49. General P General Pickup
50. General T General Trip
51. Protready Protective relay is ready
52. 79Disable Auto Reclose Disable
53. 79Enable Auto Reclose Enable
54. 79Lockout Auto Reclose in lockout condition.
55. 79Reclose Reclose Command issued
56. 79Reclaim Reclaim time in progress
57. 79 Dead T Dead time in Progress
58. TCS-Fail TCS fail signal
59. TCS-OK TCS Healthy signal
60. PushButn 1 Push Button for CB trip
61. PushButn 2 Push Button for CB close
62. IN1 Input Staus 1
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 250 of 335
ADR245B

71. INA Input Staus A
72. INB Input Staus B
73. INC Input Staus C
74. ANDA ANDA Equation of Boolean function
75. ANDB ANDB Equation of Boolean function
76. ANDC ANDC Equation of Boolean function
77. ANDD ANDD Equation of Boolean function
78. VTS ALARM VT Supervision Alarm
79. CTS ALARM CT Supervision Alarm
80. I2/I1>1 P I2/I1>1 ratio pickup
82. I2/I1>1 T I2/I1>1 ratio trip
83. I2/I1>2 T I2/I1>2 ratio trip
85. IO/I1>1 T I0/I1>2 ratio pickup
86. Seq V>1 P Sequential Over Voltage Pickup on First stage
87. Seq V>2 P Sequential Over Voltage Pickup on second stage
88. Seq V>1 T Sequential Over Voltage trip on First stage
89. Seq V>2 T Sequential Over Voltage trip on second stage
8.21.1.2 List of the Sub menus of Status Configuration
STATUS contacts can be assigned by selecting any function given in the sub menus. There
are in all 10 No’s of Relays i.e. STATUS 1 to STATUS B [1 corresponds to STATUS 1, 2
corresponds to STATUS 2 in their respectively manner and 9 corresponds to STATUS 9, A
corresponds to STATUS A].
The functions assigned to Opto Input are listed below.

1. None
2. RemoteRst Remote reset
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 251 of 335
ADR245B
3. BLKReclose Block Reclose command

4. Active G2 Group2 Activation
5. TRIP External trip input
6. EXT DRTRIG Disturbance record trigger
7. IP>1 B Block Phase O/C stage1
11. IE>1 B Block E/F stage1
14. 3I0>1 B Block residual protection stage1
17. Seq I>1 B Block Neg. Seq protection stage1
18. Seq I>2 B Block Neg. Seq protection stage2
19. 50 BF Ext External BF initiation
20. VTS TRIG External VTS trig input
21. LR Switch Local Remote switch.
8.22 Latch IO Setting
8.22.1 To Set – Latch IO Setting

Password protected window for “Latch IO Setting” setting i.e.
Reclosing
Lat Rly, Latch G LED and Latch R LED.
AproLogic
 Latch IO Setting 
AndEq Time Setting Press the Left arrow key () to move to the next option.
Editable setting
Latch IO Setting
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 252 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
Latch Rly = BA987654321
= 00000000000 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
arrow key (- /) Latch Rly can be selected. i.e. 0 or 1 (0
Editable setting
Latch G LED = 8765432
arrow key (- /) Latch G LED can be selected. i.e. 0 or 1 (0
Editable setting
Latch R LED = 8765432
arrow key (- /) Latch R LED can be selected. i.e. 0 or 1 (0
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
Reclosing
AproLogic
AndEq Time Setting
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 253 of 335
ADR245B
8.22.2 To Set – Latch IO Setting

Reclosing
AproLogic
AndEq Time Setting
This window shows the Latch Rly & Latch R LED settings.
= 00000000000
Latch G LED = 8765432 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
= 0000000
This window shows the Latch R LEDsettings.

= 0000000
Reclosing
AproLogic
AndEq Time Setting
8.23 AndEq Time Setting
8.23.1 To Set – AndEq Time Setting

Password protected window for “AndEq Time Setting” setting
AproLogic
i.e. EQU A top, EQU A tres, EQU B top, EQU B tres, EQU C
Latch IO Setting
 AndEq Time Setting  top, EQU C tres, EQU D top and EQU D tres.
Fault 1
Editable setting
AndEq Time Setting
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 254 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
AndEq Time Setting
EQU A top =0010.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 3600s arrow key (- /) the desired EQU A top (i.e. Equation Time
Delay Operate) can be set. The setting range is from 0s to
3600s in steps of 0.1s
Editable setting
AndEq Time Setting
EQU A tres =0010.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 3600s arrow key (- /) the desired EQU A tres (i.e. Equation Time
Delay Reset) can be set. The setting range is from 0s to 3600s
in steps of 0.1s
Editable setting
AndEq Time Setting
EQU B top =0010.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 3600s arrow key (- /) the desired EQU B top (i.e. Equation Time
Editable setting
AndEq Time Setting
EQU B tres =0010.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 3600s arrow key (- /) the desired EQU B tres (i.e. Equation Time
in steps of 0.1s
Editable setting
AndEq Time Setting
EQU C top =0010.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 3600s arrow key (- /) the desired EQU C top (i.e. Equation Time
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 255 of 335
ADR245B
Editable setting
AndEq Time Setting
EQU C tres =0010.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 3600s arrow key (- /) the desired EQU C tres (i.e. Equation Time
in steps of 0.1s
Editable setting
AndEq Time Setting
EQU D top =0010.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 3600s arrow key (- /) the desired EQU D top (i.e. Equation Time
Editable setting
AndEq Time Setting
EQU D tres =0010.0 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
0 – 3600s arrow key (- /) the desired EQU D tres (i.e. Equation Time
in steps of 0.1s
 For SAVE
RESET For Cancel
Main Menu.
SAVE Settings
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 256 of 335
ADR245B
AproLogic
Latch IO Setting
 AndEq Time Setting 
Fault 1

AproLogic
Latch IO Setting
Fault 1
This window shows the AndEq Time settings.

EQU A top = 0010.0s
EQU A tres = 0010.0s
EQU B top = 0010.0s Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
EQU B tres = 0010.0s
This window shows the AndEq Time settings.

EQU C top = 0010.0s
EQU C tres = 0010.0s
EQU D top = 0010.0s Press the Right arrow key () to move to the Main Menu.
EQU D tres = 0010.0s
AproLogic
Latch IO Setting
Fault 1
8.24 Fault 1
8.24.1 To view – Fault 1

Latch IO Setting
AndEq Time Setting
 Fault 1
Fault 2
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 257 of 335
ADR245B

>1 :
>2 :
>3 : Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
>4 :
This window shows the Trip Counter, Status, Date & Time
TC:000 ST :
settings.
Date : 00/00/00
Time : 00:00:00.000 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
This window shows the Primary Current Values.

Primary Current
A=00000A B=00000A
C=00000A N=00000A Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
This window shows the Primary Volt Values.

Primary volt (kv)
A=000.00 B=000.00
C=000.00 N=000.00 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
This window shows the Secondary Current Values.

Secondary Current
a=000.00 b=000.00
c=000.00 n=000.00 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
This window shows the Secondary Voltage Values.

Secondary Voltage
a=000.00 b=000.00
c=000.00 n=000.00 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the Main Menu.
This window shows the Voltage & current Symmetrical Values.

Pri I(A) Volt (Kv)
I1=00004 V1=000.00
I2=00004 V2=000.00 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the Main Menu.
3Io=00004 3Vo=000.00
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 258 of 335
ADR245B
Latch IO Setting
AndEq Time Setting
 Fault 1
Fault 2
NOTE: Fault 2 to Fault 10 can be viewed similarly.
8.25 Status
8.25.1 To view – Status

Fault 8
Fault 9
Fault 10
 Status
This window shows the Relay Type, Model No, HW and SW

ADR245B_V2_R3
Version and Unit ID.
AM220–6–X–8–3–1–X
Hw: V2.0 SW:V03.00.07
ID: 0001 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.

In1 : OFF In5:OFF
In2 : OFF In6:OFF
In3 : OFF In7:OFF Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
In4 : OFF In8:OFF

In9 : OFF
InA : OFF
InB : OFF Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
InC : OFF

Out1: OFF Out5:OFF
Out2: OFF Out6:OFF
Out3: OFF Out7:OFF Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.
Out4: OFF Out8:OFF
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 259 of 335
ADR245B

Out9: OFF
OutA: OFF
OutB: OFF Press the Right arrow key () to move to the next option.

Rec Cntr= 0000
Readconf Ver: Press the Right arrow key () to move to the Main Menu.
V03.01
Fault 8
Fault 9
Fault 10
 Status
8.26 Error Log

8.26.1 To view – Error Log
Fault 10
Status
Error Log 
Close
This window shows the Error Code, Trip Ckt Test, InB, InC and
Error Code : 0000
Trip Ckt.
Trip Ckt Test : ON
InB: OFF InC : OFF
Trip Ckt : Faulty Press the Right arrow key () to move to the Main Menu
Fault 10
Status
Error Log 
Close
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 260 of 335
ADR245B
8.27 Date / Time Settings

8.27.1 To Set – Date / Time Settings
Password protected window for “DATE AND TIME” settings
Error Log
i.e. SET Hours, SET Minutes, SET Seconds, SET Date, SET
Close
Active Group Month and SET Year.
 Date / Time 
Editable setting
Datetime Setting
Editable Setting
Time Set : 1
SET Hrs = 015 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
Range 0 – 23 arrow key (- /) the desired SET Hours can be set. The
setting range is from 0 to 23 in steps of 1.
Editable Setting
Time Set : 2
SET Mins = 21 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
Range 0 – 59 arrow key (- /) the desired SET Minutes can be set. The
Editable Setting
Time Set : 3
SET Sec = 50 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
Range 0 – 59 arrow key (- /) the desired SET Seconds can be set. The
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 261 of 335
ADR245B
Editable Setting
Date Set : 1
SET Date = 12 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
Range 1 – 31 arrow key (- /) the desired SET Date can be set. The setting
range is from 1 to 31 in steps of 1.
Editable Setting
Date Set : 2
SET Month = 012 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
Range 1 – 12 arrow key (- /) the desired SET Month can be set. The
Editable Setting
Date Set : 3
SET Year = 015 By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /) or the Minus / Down
Range 0 – 99 arrow key (- /) the desired SET Year can be set. The setting
range is from 0 to 99 in steps of 1.
Press the Left arrow key () or Right arrow key () to move to
the next option.
Press the Left arrow key () to SAVE Setting.
< For SAVE

This window will flash for a moment and return to the Main
Menu.
SAVE Settings
Error Log
Close
Active Group
 Date / Time 
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 262 of 335
ADR245B
8.27.2 To view –Date / Time Settings

Error Log
Close
Active Group
 Date / Time 
This window shows the Date and Time.
Time : 15:10:05
Date : 15/12/15 Press the Right arrow key () to move to the Main Menu
Error Log
Close
Active Group
 Date / Time 
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 263 of 335
ADR245B
Section 9
Flow Chart
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/FC
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 265 of 335
ADR245B
Contents
9 Flow Chart Overview 268
9.1 Main Menu 268
9.2 Flow Chart – EDIT and SAVE settings 269
9.5 Flow Chart – General Setting 272
9.5.1 To Set – General Setting 272
9.5.2 To View – General Setting 273
9.6 Flow Chart –IP Configuration 274
9.7 Flow Chart – Phase Overcurrent 276
9.8 Flow Chart – Ground Overcurrent 278
9.9 Flow Chart – Residual Overcurrent 280
9.10 Flow Chart – Sequence Overcurrent 282
9.11 Flow Chart – Under/Over Voltage 284
9.11.2 To View – Under/Over Voltage 285
9.12 Flow Chart –Residual OverVoltage 286
9.12.1 To Set – Residual OverVoltage 286
9.12.2 To View – Residual OverVoltage 287
9.13 Flow Chart – Sequence OverVoltage 288
9.13.1 To Set – Sequence OverVoltage 288
9.13.2 To View – Sequence OverVoltage 289
9.14 Flow Chart – I2/I1 (46BC) 290
9.14.1 To Set – I2/I1 (46BC) 290
9.14.2 To View – I2/I1 (46BC) 291
9.15 Flow Chart – I0/I1 (50BC) 292
9.15.1 To Set – I0/I1 (50BC) 292
9.15.2 To View – I0/I1 (50BC) 293
9.16 Flow Chart – VT Supervision 294
9.17 Flow Chart – CT Supervision 296
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 266 of 335
ADR245B

9.18 Flow Chart – Reclosing 298
9.19 Flow Chart – AProLogic 300
9.19.1.1 To Set – AProLogic (OUT, LED G, LED R and Boolean Logic) 301
9.19.1.2 To Set – AProLogic (Status ) 305
9.20 Flow Chart – Latch IO 306
9.20.1 To Set – Latch IO 306
9.20.2 To View – Latch IO 307
9.21 Flow Chart – AndEq Time Setting 308
9.21.2 To View – AndEq Time Setting 309
9.22 Flow Chart – Fault 310
9.22.1 To View – Fault 1 310
9.23 Flow Chart – Status 311
9.23.1 To View – Status 311
9.24 Flow Chart – Error Log 312
9.24.1 To View – Error Log 312
9.25 Flow Chart –Date / Time 313
9.25.1 To Set – Date / Time 313
9.25.2 To View – Date / Time 314
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 267 of 335
ADR245B
9 FLOW CHART OVERVIEW
9.1 Main Menu

After the Power ON or when LED RESET + HW RESET key pressed the following windows will
be displayed and the user can scroll the main menu as given below
IAMAG= 0.00A Ashida Directional
IBMAG= 0.00A 3OC/1EF IDMT Relay
ICMAG= 0.00A ADR245B_V2_R3
INMAG= 0.00A V:03:00:07 ID :0001
Measurement 1
Measurement 2 3
General Settings
IP Configuration
Phase Overcurrent
Ground Overcurrent
Sequence Over Current
Under/Over Voltage
I2/I1 (46BC)
I0/I1 (50BC)
VT Supervision
CT Supervision
Reclosing
AProLogic
Latch IO Settings
AndEq Time Settings
Fault 1
Fault 2
Fault 3
Fault 4
Fault 5
Fault 6
Fault 7
Fault 8
Fault 9
Fault 10
Status
Error Log
Close
Trip
Active Group : G1
Date / Time
Note: By using the Up arrow key ( 5 ) and the down arrow key (6 ) the Main Menu settings can be scrolled.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 268 of 335
ADR245B
9.2 Flow Chart – EDIT and SAVE settings

This is the default window showing the online values IAMAG= 0.00A
of voltages IBMAG= 0.00A
Step 1 : Press the Left arrow key (3) the relay will ICMAG= 0.00A
display Main Menu. INMAG= 0.00A
5
Step 2 : Using Plus / Up arrow Key (+ /5) or Minus /
Down arrow key (- /6) key scroll the Main Menu / Measurement 1
Group and select any setting that needs to be Edited. Measurement 2
è General Settings ç
e.g. General Settings
IP Configuration
Step 3 : Press the Left arrow key (3) to move to the
5
next option.
This window show the New Password General Settings
New PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
EDIT
[All Editable settings are password protected. The
Password is four (4) digits alpha numeric. i.e. 0000 – General Settings
FFFF ]. New PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF ∧
Step 4 : Press the LED Reset / Edit Key it will display General Settings
the curser ( ∧ ) below the digits at Extreme Right. This New PassWord = 0000
curser ( ∧ ) can be shifted right to left and left to right Range 0000 – FFFF ∧
using the left arrow key (3) and Right Arrow key (4).
EDIT
Step 5: Enter the New password by using the Plus / General Settings
Up arrow key (+ /5) or the Minus / Down arrow key New PassWord = 0000
(- /6). Range 0000 – FFFF
Step 6: After editing the New Password, press the

EDIT Key.
Note: When the password is set, modification to the
relay can be done in any settings within 15 minutes.
After the lapse of 15 minutes, the relay will once again
ask to restore the password.
5
3 For Save
Step 7 : Press the Left arrow key (3) to move to the
next option. LED RESET For Cancel
Note : [Continue to press the Left arrow key (3) ] to

move to the SAVE Setting window.
SAVE Settings
Step 8: Press the Left arrow key (3) to SAVE the 3
changes
OR
Step 9: Press the LED RESET key to CANCEL the
Changes. (i.e. DISCARD Settings)
DISCARD Settings LED RESET
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 269 of 335
ADR245B
9.3 Flow Chart – Measurement 1
9.3.1 To View – Measurement 1

è Measurement 1 ç
Measurement 2
4
General Settings
IP Configuration
6 5
IAMAG= 0.00A
IBMAG= 0.00A
ICMAG= 0.00A
INMAG= 0.00A
6 5
IaMAG= 0.000A
IbMAG= 0.000A
IcMAG= 0.000A
InMAG= 0.000A
6 5
I1MAG= 0.000A
I2MAG= 0.000A
3I0MAG= 0.002A
VANMAG= 0.00kV
6 5
VBNMAG= 0.00kV
VCNMAG= 0.00kV
VNMAG= 0.00kV
VABMAG= 0.00kV
6 5
VBCMAG= 0.00kV
VCAMAG= 0.00kV
VanMAG= 0.002V
VbnMAG= 0.003V
6 5
VcnMAG= 0.003V
VnMAG= 0.003V
VabMAG= 0.000V
VbcMAG= 0.000V
6 5
VcaMAG= 0.000V
V1MAG= 0.000A
V2MAG= 0.000A
3V0MAG= 0.000A
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 270 of 335
ADR245B
9.4 Flow Chart – Measurement 2
9.4.1 To View – Measurement 2
Measurement 1
è Measurement 2 ç
4
General Settings
IP Configuration
6
5
PA=0.000MW
PB=0.000MW
PC=0.000MW
3P=0.000MW
6
5
QA=0.000MVAr
QB=0.000MVAr
QC=0.000MVAr
3Q=0.000MVAr
6
5
SA=0.0000MVA
SB=0.0000MVA
SC=0.0000MVA
3S=0.0000MVA
6
5
FREQ=0.00Hz
PFA=0.000
PFB=0.000
PFC=0.000
6
5
3PF=0.000
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 271 of 335
ADR245B
9.5 Flow Chart – General Setting
9.5.1 To Set – General Setting

Measurement 1
Measurement 2
IP Configuration
5
5
6
General Settings General Settings General Settings
PassWord = 0001 Frequency = 50Hz Ph CT Primary = 0100
Range 0000 – FFFF 50Hz/6Hz 10 – 5000A
5
5
5
(*)
EDIT
6
6
6
General Settings General Settings General Settings General Settings

New PassWord = 0000 Active Group = G1 EF CT Secondary = 1A TCS = OFF
Range 0000 – FFFF G1/G2 1A/5A OFF/ON
5
5
5
5
(*)
EDIT
6
6
6
6

Unit ID = 001 50 BF = Byp EF CT Primary = 0010 R Angle Offset = 000
Range 001 – 250 Int/Ext/Byp 10 – 5000A 00 – 359
5
5
5
5
6
6
6

Baud Rate = 57600 50 BF_I = 0070 VT Primary = 001KV Y Angle Offset = 000
Range 1200 – 57600 10 – 200% 1 – 400KV 00 – 359
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6

Com Port = RS232 50 BF Delay = 0200 VT Secondary = 63.5V B Angle Offset = 000
RS232/RS485 100 – 2000ms 63.5V(Ln) 00 – 359
5
5
5
5
6
6
6

Set Parity = None Ph CT Secondary = 1A Local Control = OFF Post Trigger = 010
None/Even/Odd 1A/5A OFF/ON 10% – 90%
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
LED RESET For Cancel
Note : (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer Edit Password and Save Setting in Flow Chart.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 272 of 335
ADR245B
9.5.2 To View – General Setting

Measurement 1
Measurement 2
4
IP Configuration
6
5
Unit ID = 0001
Baud Rate = 57600
Com Port = RS232
Set Parity = None
6
5
Frequency = 50Hz
Active Group = G1
50 BF = Byp
50 BF_I = 0070
6
5
50 BF Delay = 0200
Ph CT Secondary = 1A
Ph CT Primary = 0100
EF CT Secondary = 1A
6
5
EF CT Primary = 0010
VT Primary = 001KV
VT Secondary = 63.5V
Local Control = OFF
6
5
TCS = OFF
R Angle Offset = 0000
Y Angle Offset = 0000
B Angle Offset = 0000
6
5
Post Trigger = 0010
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 273 of 335
ADR245B
9.6 Flow Chart –IP Configuration
9.6.1 To Set – IP Configuration

Measurement 2
General Settings
è IP Configuration ç
Phase Overcurrent
5
General Settings
(*) PassWord = 0001
EDIT
Range 0000 – FFFF
5 6
IP Configuration
(*) IP Address =
EDIT
192.168.001.100
5 6
5 6
IP Configuration IP Configuration
(*) Subnet Mask = (*) Sec. SNTP =
EDIT 255.000.000.000 EDIT 000.000.000.000
5 6
5 6
(*) Default Gatway = (*) GMT =
EDIT EDIT + 05.30
255.255.255.0000
5 6
5 6
(*) Pri. SNTP = (*) IED Name =
EDIT 000.000.000.000
EDIT TEMPLATE
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 274 of 335
ADR245B
9.6.2 To View – IP Configuration
Measurement 2
General Settings
4
è IP Configuration ç
Phase Overcurrent
6
5
IP Address =
192.168.001.100
Subnet Mask =
255.255.255.000
6
5
Pri. SNTP =
000.000.000.000
Sec SNTP =
000.000.000.000
6
5
Default Gateway =
000.000.000.000
GMT =
+05.30
6
5
IED Name =
TEMPLATE
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 275 of 335
ADR245B
9.7 Flow Chart – Phase Overcurrent
9.7.1 To Set – Phase Overcurrent
General Settings
IP Configuration
è Phase Overcurrent ç
Ground Overcurrent
5
Phase O/C G1
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5
5
5
(*)
EDIT
6
6
6
Phase O/C G1 Phase O/C G1 Phase O/C G1

Phase O/C G1
IP>1 Enable = OFF IP>2 Enable = OFF IP>4 Enable = OFF
IP>3 Enable = OFF
OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDr/VC OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDr/VC OFF/+Dir/-Dir/Ndir
OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDr/VC
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
Phase O/C G1 Phase O/C G1 Phase O/C G1 Phase O/C G1

IP>1 = 0010 IP>2 = 0010 IP>3 = 0010 IP>4 = 0100
10% – 250% 10% – 250% 10% – 250% 50% – 3000%
5
5
5
5
6
6
6

IP>1 TMS = 0.010 IP>2 TMS = 0.010 IP>3 TMS = 0.010 tIP>4 DT = 00.05
0.010 – 1.000 0.010 – 1.000 0.010 – 1.000 0 – 90.00s
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6

IP>1 Curve = 0001 IP>2 Curve = 0001 IP>3 Curve = 0001 Phase MTA = 0000
C1 – C6 C1 – C6 C1 – C6 0 – 360Lead
5
5
5
6
6
Phase O/C G1 Phase O/C G1 Phase O/C G1

tIP>1 C6 DT = 0000.1 tIP>2 C6 DT = 0000.1 tIP>3 C6 DT = 000.1
0 – 1899.9s 0 – 1899.9s 0 – 99.9s
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 276 of 335
ADR245B
9.7.2 To View – Phase Overcurrent
General Settings
IP Configuration
4
è Phase Overcurrent ç
Ground Overcurrent
6
5
IP>1= OFF IP>1=0010

IP>1 TMS = 0.010
IP>1 Curve = 0001
tIP>1 C6 DT = 0000.1
6
5
IP>2= OFF IP>2=0010

IP>2 TMS = 0.010
IP>2 Curve = 0001
tIP>2 C6 DT = 0000.1
6
5
IP>3= OFF IP>3=0010

IP>3 TMS = 0.010
IP>3 Curve = 0001
tIP>3 C6 DT = 000.1
6
5
IP>4 = OFF
IP>4 = 0100
tIP>4 DT = 00.05
Phase MTA = 000
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 277 of 335
ADR245B
9.8 Flow Chart – Ground Overcurrent
9.8.1 To Set – Ground Overcurrent

IP Configuration
Phase Overcurrent
è Ground Overcurrent ç
5
Ground O/C G1
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5 6
5 6
5 6
(*)
EDIT
Ground O/C G1 Ground O/C G1 Ground O/C G1

IE>1 Enable = OFF IE>2 Enable = OFF IE>3 Enable = OFF
OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir
5 6
5 6
5 6

IE>1 = 0020 IE>2 = 0020 IE>3 = 0100
5% – 80% 5% – 80% 50% – 1200%
5 6
5 6
5 6
IE>1 TMS = 0.010 IE>2 TMS = 0.010 tIE>3 DT = 00.05
0.010 – 1.000 0.010 – 1.000 0 – 3.00s
5 6
5 6
5 6

IE>1 Curve = 0001 IE>2 Curve = 0001 Ground MTA = 0000
C1 – C6 C1 – C6 0 – 360Lag
5 6
5 6
Ground O/C G1 Ground O/C G1

tIE>1 C6 DT = 000.1 tIE>2 C6 DT = 000.1
0 – 99.9s 0 – 99.9s
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 278 of 335
ADR245B
9.8.2 To View – Ground Overcurrent
General Settings
IP Configuration
4
è Ground Overcurrent ç
6 5
IE>1= OFF IE>1=0020

IE>1 TMS = 0.010
IE>1 Curve = 0001
tIE>1 C6 DT = 000.1
6 5
IE>2= OFF IE>2=0020

IE>2 TMS = 0.010
IE>2 Curve = 0001
tIE>2 C6 DT = 000.1
6 5
IE>3 = OFF
IE>3 = 0100
tIE>3 DT = 00.05
Ground MTA = 000
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 279 of 335
ADR245B
9.9 Flow Chart – Residual Overcurrent
9.9.1 To Set – Residual Overcurrent

Phase Overcurrent
Ground Overcurrent
è Residual Overcurrent ç
5
Residual O/C G1
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5 6
5 6
5 6
(*)
EDIT
Residual O/C G1 Residual O/C G1 Residual O/C G1

3Io>1 Enable = OFF 3Io>2 Enable = OFF 3Io>3 Enable = OFF
OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir OFF/+Dir/-Dir/NDir OFF/+Dir/-Dir/Ndir
5 6
5 6
5 6

3Io>1 = 0010 3Io>2 = 0010 3Io>3 = 0100
10% – 250% 10% – 250% 50% – 1200%
5 6
5 6
Residual O/C G1 Residual O/C G1 5 6

Residual O/C G1
3Io>1 TMS = 0.010 3Io>2 TMS = 0.010 t3Io>3 DT = 00.05
0.010 – 1.000 0.010 – 1.000 0 – 3.00s
5 6
5 6
5 6

3Io>1 Curve = 0001 3Io>2 Curve = 0001 3Io MTA = 0000
C1 – C6 C1 – C6 0 – 360Lag
5 6
5 6
Residual O/C G1 Residual O/C G1

t3Io>1 C6 DT = 000.1 t3Io>2 C6 DT = 000.1
0 – 99.9s 0 – 99.9s
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 280 of 335
ADR245B
9.9.2 To View – Residual Overcurrent
Phase Overcurrent
Ground Overcurrent
4
èResidual Overcurrentç
6
5
3Io>1= OFF 3Io>1=0020

3Io>1 TMS = 0.010
3Io>1 Curve = 0001
t3Io>1 C6 DT = 000.1
6
5
3Io>2= OFF
3Io>2= 0010
3Io>2 TMS = 0.010
3Io>2 C6 DT = 000.1
6
5
3Io>3 = OFF
3Io>3 = 0100
3Io>3 DT = 00.05
3Io MTA = 000
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 281 of 335
ADR245B
9.10 Flow Chart – Sequence Overcurrent
9.10.1 To Set – Sequence Overcurrent

Ground Overcurrent
èSequence Overcurrentç
Under/Over Voltage
5
Sequence O/C G1
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5
(*)
EDIT
6
Sequence O/C G1 Sequence O/C G1
Seq.I>1 = +Seq Seq.I>2 = +Seq
OFF/+Seq/-Seq OFF/+Seq/-Seq
5
5
6
6

Seq.I>1 = 0020 Seq.I>2 = 0100
10% – 100% 50% – 1500%
5
5
6
6
Seq.I>1 TMS = 0.010 Seq.I>2 DT = 00.05
0.010 – 1.000 0 – 3.00s
5
6
Sequence O/C G1
Seq.I>1 Curve = 0001
C1 – C6
5
6
Sequence O/C G1
tSeq.I>1 C6 DT = 000.1
0 – 99.9s
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 282 of 335
ADR245B
9.10.2 To View – Sequence Overcurrent
Ground Overcurrent
4
è Sequence Overcurrent ç
Under/Over Voltage
6
5
Seq.I>1 = +Seq
Seq.I>1 = 020
Seq.I>1 TMS = 0.010
Seq.I>1 Curve = 001
6
5
tSeq.I>1 C6 DT = 00.1
Seq.I>2 = +Seq
Seq.I>2 = 0100
Seq.I>2 DT = 0.05
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 283 of 335
ADR245B
9.11 Flow Chart – Under/Over Voltage
9.11.1 To Set – Under/Over Voltage
è Under/Over Voltage ç
Residual Overvoltage
5
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5
(*)
EDIT
6
6
Under/Over Voltage G1 Under/Over Voltage G1
Under Voltage = ON Over Voltage = ON
OFF/ON/AND/+SEQ OFF/ON/AND
5
5
6
6
Under/Over Voltage G1 Under/Over Voltage G1

V< = 0045 V> = 0110
25% – 95% 105% – 155%
5
5
6
Under/Over O/C G1 Under/Over O/C G1

tV< = 010.0 tV> = 000.1
0 – 99.9s 0 – 99.0s
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 284 of 335
ADR245B
9.11.2 To View – Under/Over Voltage
4
è Under/Over Voltage ç
6
5
Under Voltage = ON
V< = 045%
tV< = 10.0s
6
5
Over Voltage = ON
V> = 0110%
tV> = 010.0s
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 285 of 335
ADR245B
9.12 Flow Chart –Residual OverVoltage
9.12.1 To Set – Residual OverVoltage

Under/Over Voltage
èResidual OverVoltage ç
Sequence OverVoltage
5
Residual G1
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5 6
(*)
EDIT
Residual O/V G1
VN = OFF
OFF/Measured/Derived
5 6
Residual O/V G1
VN> = 010.0
10.0 – 100.0V
5 6
Residual O/V G1
tVN> = 001.0
0.0 – 99.0s
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 286 of 335
ADR245B
9.12.2 To View – Residual OverVoltage
Under/Over Voltage
èResidual OverVoltage ç
Sequence OverVoltage
6
5
VN> = OFF
VN> = 010.0v
tVN> = 010.0s
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 287 of 335
ADR245B
9.13 Flow Chart – Sequence OverVoltage
9.13.1 To Set – Sequence OverVoltage
Under/Over Voltage
è Sequence Overvoltageç
I2/I1 (46BC)
5
Sequence O/V G1
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5
(*)
EDIT 6
6
Sequence O/V G1 Sequence O/V G1
Seq.V>1 = OFF Seq.V>2 = OFF
OFF/+Seq/-Seq OFF/+Seq/-Seq
5
5
6
6

Seq.V>1 = 010.0 Seq.V>2 = 010.0
5.0 – 100.0V 5.0 – 100.0V
5
5
6

tSeq.V>1 = 01.0 tSeq.V>2 = 01.0
0 – 99.0s 0 – 99.0s
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 288 of 335
ADR245B
9.13.2 To View – Sequence OverVoltage
Under/Over Voltage
4
è Sequence Overvoltageç
I2/I1 (46BC)
6
5
Seq.V>1 = OFF
Seq.V>1 = 010.0v
tSeq.V>1 = 59.9s
6
5
Seq.V>2 = OFF
Seq.V>2 = 010.0v
tSeq.V>2 = 59.9s
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 289 of 335
ADR245B
9.14 Flow Chart – I2/I1 (46BC)
9.14.1 To Set – I2/I1 (46BC)

Sequence Overvoltage
è I2/I1 (46BC)ç
I0/I1 (50BC)
5
I2/I1 (46BC) G1
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5
(*)
EDIT 6
6
I2/I1 (46BC) G1 I2/I1 (46BC) G1
I2/I1>1 = OFF I2/I1>2 = OFF
OFF/ON/&I2/&50BC OFF/ON
5
5
6
6
I2/I1 (46BC) G1 I2/I1 (46BC) G1

I2/I1>1 = 1.00 I2/I1>2 = 1.00
0.1 – 1.00Pu 0.1 – 1.0Pu
5
5
6
I2/I1 (46BC) G1 I2/I1 (46BC) G1

tI2/I1>1 = 10.0 tI2/I1>2 = 10.0
0 – 99.0s 0 – 99.0s
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 290 of 335
ADR245B
9.14.2 To View – I2/I1 (46BC)
Sequence Overvoltage
4
è I2/I1 (46BC)ç
I0/I1 (50BC)
6
5
I2/I1>1 = OFF
I2/I1>1 = 1.00Pu
tI2/I1>1 = 10.0s
6
5
I2/I1>2 = OFF
I2/I1>2 = 1.00Pu
tI2/I1>2 = 10.0s
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 291 of 335
ADR245B
9.15 Flow Chart – I0/I1 (50BC)
9.15.1 To Set – I0/I1 (50BC)

I2/I1 (46BC)
èI0/I1 (50BC) ç
VT Supervision
5
I0/I1 (50BC) G1
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5
(*)
EDIT
6
I0/I1 (50BC) G1
I0/I1>1 = OFF
OFF/ON
5
6
I0/I1 (50BC) G1
I0/I1>1 = 1.00
0.1 – 1.0Pu
5
6
I0/I1 (50BC) G1
tI0/I1>1 = 10.0
0 – 99.0s
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 292 of 335
ADR245B
9.15.2 To View – I0/I1 (50BC)

I2/I1 (46BC)
èI0/I1 (50BC) ç
VT Supervision
6
5
I0/I1>1 = OFF
I0/I1>1 = 1.00Pu
tI0/I1>1 = 10.0s
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 293 of 335
ADR245B
9.16 Flow Chart – VT Supervision
9.16.1 To Set – VT Supervision

I2/I1 (46BC)
I0/I1 (50BC)
èVT Supervisionç
CT Supervision
5
VT Supervision
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5
(*)
EDIT
6
6
VT Supervision VT Supervision
VTS = OFF I1 = 010
OFF/Int/Ext 5 – 200%
5
5
6
6
EXT VTS Ip = 1>0 I2 = 050
1>0 / 0>1 20 – 50%
5
5
6
6
V1 = 010 I0 = 020
5 – 60V 20 – 50%
5
5
6
V2 = 010 VTS Delay = 00.01
5 – 40V 0.00 – 10.00s
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 294 of 335
ADR245B
9.16.2 To View – VT Supervision
I2/I1 (46BC)
I0/I1 (50BC)
4
èVT Supervisionç
CT Supervision
6
5
VTS = OFF
EXT VTS Ip = 1>0
V1 = 010V
V2 = 010V
6
5
I1 = 010%
I2 = 050%
I0 = 020%
VTS Delay = 00.01s
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 295 of 335
ADR245B
9.17 Flow Chart – CT Supervision
9.17.1 To Set – CT Supervision

I0/I1 (50BC)
VT Supervision
èCT Supervisionç
Reclosing
5
CT Supervision
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5 6
5 6
(*)
EDIT
CT Supervision CT Supervision
CTS = OFF V1> = 10.0
OFF/ON 5 – 100V
5 6
5 6
37I< = 0.00 V2< = 10.0
0.05 to 1.5 Pu 5 – 100V
5 6
CT Supervision 5 6
CT Supervision
I2/I1 > = 0.50 V0< = 10.0
0.05 to 1Pu 5 – 100V
5 6
5 6
I0/I1> = 0.10 CTS Delay = 00.00
0.05 to 1Pu 0.00 – 10.00s
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 296 of 335
ADR245B
9.17.2 To View – CT Supervision
I0/I1 (50BC)
VT Supervision
4
èCT Supervisionç
Reclosing
6
5
CTS = OFF
37I< = 1.50Pu
I2/I1> = 0.50Pu
I0/I1> = 0.10Pu
65
V1> = 010V
V2< = 020V
V0< = 020V
CTS Delay = 00.00s
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 297 of 335
ADR245B
9.18 Flow Chart – Reclosing
9.18.1 To Set – Reclosing
VT Supervision
CT Supervision
è Reclosing ç
AproLogic
5
Reclosing
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5
(*)
EDIT 6
6
Reclosing Reclosing
Reclosing = OFF Dead Time 3 = 001.00
0–4 0.10 – 180.00s
5
5
6
6
Reclosing Reclosing
Dead Time 1 = 001.00 Dead Time 4 = 001.00
0.10 – 180.00s 0.10 – 180.00s
5
5
6
Reclosing Reclosing
Dead Time 2 = 001.00 Reclaim Time = 0200.0
0.10 – 180.00s 10.0 – 300.0s
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 298 of 335
ADR245B
9.18.2 To View – Reclosing
VT Supervision
CT Supervision
4
è Reclosing ç
AproLogic
6
5
Reclosing = OFF
6
5

Reclaim Time = 0200.0s
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 299 of 335
ADR245B
9.19 Flow Chart – AProLogic
9.19.1 To Set – AProLogic
VT Supervision
CT Supervision
è Reclosing ç
AproLogic
5
Reclosing
(*) PassWord = 0001
EDIT
Range 0000 – FFFF
5
6
OUT = BA987654321
PhaseA>1T = 00000000000
EDIT
5
5
6
6
Boolean Logic = DCBA
LED G = 8765432 PhaseA>1T = 0000
EDIT EDIT
PhaseA>1T = 0000000
5
5
6
LED R = 8765432 Status = A9876543321

PhaseA>1T = 0000000 None = 0000000000
EDIT EDIT
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 300 of 335
ADR245B
9.19.1.1 To Set – AProLogic (OUT, LED G, LED R and Boolean Logic)

VT Supervision
CT Supervision
è Reclosing ç
AproLogic
5
Reclosing
(*) PassWord = 0001
EDIT
Range 0000 – FFFF
5
3
3
6
4
4
OUT = BA987654321 OUT = BA987654321 OUT = BA987654321
(*) 3i0>1 T = 00000000000 PhaseA>4T = 00000000000
PhaseA>1T = 00000000000
EDIT
3
3
3
4
4
4

PhaseB>1T = 00000000000 PhaseA>3T = 00000000000 PhaseB>4T = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

PhaseC>1T = 00000000000 PhaseB>3T = 00000000000 PhaseC>4T = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

PhaseA>2T = 00000000000 PhaseC>3T = 00000000000 GND IE>3T = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

PhaseB>2T = 00000000000 GND IE>2T = 00000000000 3I0>3 T = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

PhaseC>2T = 00000000000 3i0>2 T = 00000000000 Seq i>2 T = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

GND IE>1T = 00000000000 Seq I> 1 T = 00000000000 V>P = 00000000000
3
4
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 301 of 335
ADR245B
3
3
4
4
4
V>T = 00000000000 79Disable = 00000000000 IN 1 = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4
V<P = 00000000000 79Enable = 00000000000 IN 2 = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
OUT = BA987654321 OUT 4= BA987654321 OUT = BA987654321
V<T = 00000000000 79Lockout = 00000000000 IN 3 = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

NO VOLT = 00000000000 79Reclose = 00000000000 IN 4 = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

VN>T = 00000000000 79Reclaim = 00000000000 IN 5 = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

50BF = 00000000000 79Dead T = 00000000000 IN 6 = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

General P = 00000000000 TC Fail = 00000000000 IN 7 = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

General T = 00000000000 TC – OK = 00000000000 IN 8 = 00000000000
3
4
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 302 of 335
ADR245B
3
3
4
4
4
IN 9 = 00000000000 PhaseA>2P = 00000000000 GND IE>2P = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4
IN A = 00000000000 PhaseB>2P = 00000000000 3I0>2P = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
OUT = BA987654321 OUT 4
= BA987654321 OUT = BA987654321
IN B = 00000000000 PhaseC>2P = 00000000000 Seq I>1 P = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

IN C = 00000000000 GND IE>1P = 00000000000 PhaseA>4P = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

Protready = 00000000000 3I0>1P = 00000000000 PhaseB>4P = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

PhaseA>1P = 00000000000 PhaseA>3P = 00000000000 PhaseC>4P = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

PhaseB>1P = 00000000000 PhaseB>3P = 00000000000 GND IE>3P = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

PhaseC>1P = 00000000000 PhaseC>3P = 00000000000 3I0>3P = 00000000000
3
4
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 303 of 335
ADR245B
3
3
4
4
4
Seq I>2 P = 00000000000 I2/I1>2 P = 00000000000 Seq V>1 T = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4
AND A = 00000000000 I2/I1>1 T = 00000000000 Seq V>2 T = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

AND B = 00000000000 I2/I1>2 T = 00000000000 PushButn1 = 00000000000
3
3
3
4
4
4

AND C = 00000000000 I0/I1>1 P = 00000000000 PushButn2 = 00000000000
3
3
4
OUT = BA987654321 OUT = BA987654321

AND D = 00000000000 I0/I1>1 T = 00000000000
3
3
4
OUT = BA987654321 OUT = BA987654321

VTS ALARM = 00000000000 VN>P = 00000000000
3
3
4
OUT = BA987654321 OUT = BA987654321

CTS ALARM = 00000000000 Seq V>1 P = 00000000000
3
3
4
OUT = BA987654321 OUT = BA987654321

I2/I1>1 P = 00000000000 Seq V>2 P = 00000000000
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 304 of 335
ADR245B
9.19.1.2 To Set – AProLogic (Status )
VT Supervision
CT Supervision
è Reclosing ç
AproLogic
4 3
4 3
5
Reclosing Status = A9876543321 Status = A9876543321
(*) PassWord = 0001 EXT DRTRIG = 0000000000 3I0>1 B = 00000000000
EDIT
Range 0000 – FFFF
4 3
5 6
4 3
OUT = BA987654321 Status = A9876543321 Status = A9876543321
(*)
PhaseA>1T = 00000000000 IP>1 B = 0000000000 3I0>2 B = 00000000000
EDIT
4 3
4 3
Status = A9876543321 Status = A9876543321
IP>2 B = 00000000000 3I0>3 B = 00000000000
4 3
4 3
4 3
5 6
Status = A9876543321 Status = A9876543321 Status = A9876543321

None = 0000000000 IP>3 B = 0000000000 Seq I>1B = 00000000000
EDIT
4 3
4 3
4 3
RemoteRst = 0000000000 IP>4 B = 0000000000 Seq I>2B = 00000000000
4 3
4 3
4 3

BLKReclose = 0000000000 IE>1 B = 00000000000 50BF Ext = 00000000000
4 3
4 3
4 3

Active G2 = 0000000000 IE>2 B = 00000000000 VTS TRIG = 00000000000
4 3
4 3
4 3

TRIP = 0000000000 IE>3 B = 00000000000 LR Switch = 00000000000
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 305 of 335
ADR245B
9.20 Flow Chart – Latch IO
9.20.1 To Set – Latch IO
Reclosing
AproLogic
è Latch IO Setting ç
AndEq Time Setting
5
Latch IO Setting
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5
(*)
EDIT
6
= 00000000000
EDIT
5
6
= 0000000
EDIT
5
6
= 0000000
EDIT
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 306 of 335
ADR245B
9.20.2 To View – Latch IO
Reclosing
AproLogic
4
è Latch IO Setting ç
AndEq Time Setting
6 5

= 00000000000
= 0000000
6 5

= 0000000
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 307 of 335
ADR245B
9.21 Flow Chart – AndEq Time Setting
AproLogic
Latch IO Setting
è AndEq Time Setting ç
Fault 1
5
AndEq Time Setting
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5
(*)
EDIT 6
6
AndEq Time Setting AndEq Time Setting
EQU A top = 0010.0 EQU C top = 0010.0
0 – 3600s 0 – 3600s
5
5
6
6

EQU A tres = 0010.0 EQU C tres = 0010.0
0 – 3600s 0 – 3600s
5
5
6

EQU B top = 0010.0 EQU D top = 0010.0
0 – 3600s 0 – 3600s
5
5
6

EQU B tres = 0010.0 EQU D tres = 0010.0
0 – 3600s 0 – 3600s
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 308 of 335
ADR245B
9.21.2 To View – AndEq Time Setting
AproLogic
Latch IO Setting
4
è AndEq Time Setting ç
Fault 1
6
5
EQU A top = 0010.0s

EQU A tres = 0010.0s
EQU B top = 0010.0s
EQU B tres = 0010.0s
6
5
EQU C top = 0010.0s

EQU C tres = 0010.0s
EQU D top = 0010.0s
EQU D tres = 0010.0s
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 309 of 335
ADR245B
9.22 Flow Chart – Fault
9.22.1 To View – Fault 1

Latch IO Setting
AndEq Time Setting
4
è Fault 1 ç
Fault 2
6 5
>1 :
>2 :
>3 :
>4 :
6 5
TC:000 ST :
Date : 00/00/00
Time : 00:00:00.000
6 5
Primary Current
A=00000A B=00000A
C=00000A N=00000A
6 5
Primary volt (kv)

A=000.00 B=000.00
C=000.00 N=000.00
6 5
Secondary Current
a=000.00 b=000.00
c=000.00 n=000.00
6 5
Secondary Voltage
a=000.00 b=000.00
c=000.00 n=000.00
6 5
Pri I(A) Volt (Kv)

I1=00004 V1=000.00
I2=00004 V2=000.00
3Io=00004 3Vo=000.00
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 310 of 335
ADR245B
9.23 Flow Chart – Status
9.23.1 To View – Status

Fault 8
Fault 9
4
Fault 10
è Statusç
6
5
ADR245B_V2_R3
AM220–6–X–8–3–1–X
Hw: V2.0 SW:V03.00.07
ID: 0001
6
5
In1 : OFF In5:OFF

In2 : OFF In6:OFF
In3 : OFF In7:OFF
In4 : OFF In8:OFF
6
5
In9 : OFF
InA : OFF
InB : OFF
InC : OFF
6
5
Out1: OFF Out5:OFF

Out2: OFF Out6:OFF
Out3: OFF Out7:OFF
Out4: OFF Out8:OFF
6
5
Out9: OFF
OutA: OFF
OutB: OFF
6
5
Rec Cntr= 0000
Readconf Ver:
V03.01
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 311 of 335
ADR245B
9.24 Flow Chart – Error Log
9.24.1 To View – Error Log
Fault 10
Status
è Error Logç
Close
6
5
Error Code : 0000

Trip Ckt Test : ON
InB: OFF InC : OFF
Trip Ckt : Faulty
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 312 of 335
ADR245B
9.25 Flow Chart –Date / Time
9.25.1 To Set – Date / Time
Error Log
Close
Active Group
è Date / Time ç
5
Datetime Setting
PassWord = 0001
Range 0000 – FFFF
5 6
5 6
(*)
EDIT
Time Set : 1 Date Set : 1

SET Hrs = 015 SET Date = 12
Range 0 – 23 Range 1 – 31
5 6
5 6

SET Mins = 21 SET Month = 012
5 6
5 6
SET Sec = 50 SET Year = 015
3 For Save
SAVE Settings 3 3
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 313 of 335
ADR245B
9.25.2 To View – Date / Time
Error Log
Close
Active Group
è Date / Time ç
6
5
Time : 15:10:05
Date : 15/12/15
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 314 of 335
ADR245B
Section 10
Analyzing Event and Disturbance

Record
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/DR
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 316 of 335
ADR245B
Contents
10 ANALYZING EVENT AND DISTURBANCE RECORD 318

10.1 Overview 318
10.2 Event recording 318
10.3 Disturbance recording 319
10.4 Positive Sequence Over current function 319
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 317 of 335
ADR245B
10 ANALYZING EVENT AND DISTURBANCE RECORD
10.1 Overview
The ADR245B Feeder Protection Relay provides several tools (listed below) to analyze the
cause of relay operations. Use these tools to help diagnose the cause of the relay operation
and more quickly restore the protected equipment to service.
1. Event Recording
2. Disturbance Recording
3. History Faults Recoding
All reports are stored in non-volatile memory, ensuring that a loss of power to the ADR245B
will not result in lost data.
10.2 Event recording

ADR245B relay is providing feature to record and store 512/1024 nos. Of events in non-
volatile memory through internally by protection and control functions and externally by
triggering of digital inputs, and can be extracted using communication port or viewed on front
of LCD display. The event shall be trigger on time stamp through time synchronization or
internal clock setting.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 318 of 335
ADR245B
10.3 Disturbance recording

ADR245B relay is provides built in disturbance recording facility for recoding of analogue and
digital channels. Relay records 10 nos. of disturbances and store in to non-volatile memory.
Disturbance records can be saved in IEEE COMTRADE format and same can be analyzed
in disturbance analysis software.
History Fault recording:

ADR245B relay is provides built in history fault recording facility for recoding the fault with the
voltage, current, symmetrical components parameter value. Relay records history fault and
stored in to non-volatile memory.
The following example is given to analyze the event and Distubance analyze Positive
sequence overcurrent function.
10.4 Positive Sequence Over current function

The following settings are set into the relay for simulate the Positive sequence over current
function to operate and observe the waveform in the Disturbance recording and event in the
event recording.
Stage1: Seq.I>1
Seq.I>1 = +Seq
Seq.I>1 = 50%
Seq.I>1 TMS = 1
Seq.I>1 Curve = C6
Seq.I>1 DT = 0
Assign Seq.I>1 trip function in Output relay1 (OUT1).
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 319 of 335
ADR245B
There are two stages are simulated through the power system simulator for the prefault and
fault simulation, the first stage is normal condition for 500 millisecond and second stage is
fault condition for 200 millisecond as given below.
And the above condition, The Seq.I>1 elements is operated when the Positive sequence
current exceeded the pickup value and relevant feedback is received in power system
simulator and stopped the current injection. The relevant Waveforms are recorded and it can
be analyzed by using the DR analysis software. Analogue and Digital channels should be
recorded with prefault and post fault conditions. Waveform can be exported to COMTRADE
format.
Disturbance record:
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 320 of 335
ADR245B
Event Record:
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 321 of 335
ADR245B
Section 11
Testing and Commissioning
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/TC
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 323 of 335
ADR245B
Contents
11 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 325
11.1 Commissioning Test, Equipment Required. 325
11.2 Checking of External Circuitry 325
11.3 Check Relay Setting 326
11.4 Relay Testing 327
11.5 Pick up and Trip Test: 332
11.6 Testing of Binary Output: 334
11.7 LED Test: 334
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 324 of 335
ADR245B
11 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
11.1 Commissioning Test, Equipment Required.

The following connection tests help you enter settings into the ADR245B and verify that the
relay is properly connected.
Brief functional tests ensure that the relay settings are correct. It is unnecessary to test every
element, timer, and function in these tests. Modify the procedure as necessary to conform to
your standard practices. Use the procedure at initial relay installation; you should not need to
repeat it unless major changes are made to the relay electrical connections.
a. The ADR245B installed and connected according to your protection design.
b. Digital Multi meter True RMS
c. Timer with precision 1ms.
d. Required Auxiliary supply
e. For Calibration and measurement check & Pick up test, time test, logic operation test
f. Use Power system Simulator DOBEL make F6150 or any Protective relay ac test
source:
• Minimum: single-phase voltage and current with phase angle control

• Preferred: three-phase voltage and current with phase angle control
g. A PC with serial port, terminal emulation software, and serial communications cable
with the following software (minimum configuration)
• For IEC 60870-5-103 communication check: Ashida Relay Talk-V2 software.

• Ashida Relay Assist software (Electrical Parameter Calculator) to verify
measured value of normal and sequence current & voltage
11.2 Checking of External Circuitry

Connection Tests
Step 1: Remove control voltage and ac signals from the ADR245B by opening the
appropriate breaker(s) or removing fuses
Step 2: Isolate the relay contact assigned to be the TRIP output
Step 3: Verify correct ac and dc connections by performing point-to-point continuity
checks on the associated circuits.
Step 4: Apply ac or dc control voltage to the relay. After the relay is energized, the front-
panel green ENABLED LED should illuminate.
Step 5: Use the appropriate serial cable (USB to serial Cable or equivalent) to connect a
PC to the relay.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 325 of 335
ADR245B
Step 6: Start the PC terminal emulation software and establish communication with the
relay.
Step 7: Set the correct relay time and date by using either the front panel or serial port
commands
Step 8: Verify the relay ac connections.
Step 9: Connect the ac test source current or voltage to the appropriate relay terminals.
Disconnect the current transformer and voltage transformer (if present)
secondary from the relay prior to applying test source quantities.
Step 10: Apply rated current (1 A or 5 A).
Step 11: If the relay is equipped with voltage inputs, apply rated voltage for your
application.
11.3 Check Relay Setting

The relay setting check ensures that all of application specific relay setting for the particular
installation have been correctly applied to the relay. Enter all setting manually via the relay
front panel interface.
The commissioning of following points:
a. Ensure over current and earth fault trip setting.
b. Ensure TMS setting of over current and Earth Fault are entered correctly as per
required time grading between feeder and incomer.
c. Ensure instantaneous HF setting done correctly and its definite time delay are applied
properly as per required time grading between feeder and incomer.
d. Ensure selection of extra latching type annunciation duty contacts is as per required
function.
e. Ensure measure of applied current is same as the current measure in CT secondary
f. Ensure measure of applied voltage is same as the voltage measure in PT secondary
Final Check
After completion of all relay functionality testing and relay setting check. Remove all tests as
temporary shorting leads etc. if it is necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from
the relay in order to perform the wiring verification test. It should be ensured with the CT
connection are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or schemes
diagram. Ensure all fault & Annunciation contacts, trip contacts has been reset before
leaving relay.
If relay ADR245B is a newly installed or the CB has been just maintained the trip counter of
Relay should be zero. This counter can be reset by enabling Load Default Setting menu.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 326 of 335
ADR245B
Note: This will also clear all fault memory and the set password.
Post instillation / Commissioning observation

After successful installation confirm amount of existing load voltage and current in each
phase (R, Y, and B) and Earth Fault (EF). This can be confirmed with Analogue/ Digital
current meter available on panel with relay primary and secondary current measurement
window. In normal balanced load condition, the i.e. current should be very low.
11.4 Relay Testing

Relay Calibration & Measurement
Before conducting actual test, confirm relay calibration by following method.
• Connect ADR245B relay to current injector and timer.
• Following chart shows terminal numbers of connections.
Source Terminal Relay Terminal Relay Connection

A1 – A2 Current R-CT _1A
A1 – A3 Current R-CT _5A
A4 – A5 Current Y-CT _1A
A4 – A6 Current Y-CT _5A
Current Source
B1 – B2 Current B-CT _1A
B1 – B3 Current B-CT _5A
B4 – B5 Current EF-CT _1A
B4 – B6 Current EF-CT _5A
A8 – A9 Voltage R-PT _1A
A10 – A11 Voltage Y-PT _1A
Voltage Source
B8 – B9 Voltage B-PT _1A
B10 – B11 Voltage VN-PT _1A
Power Supply (+ / -) C1 – C2 Power Supply (+ / -)
C3 (In1-InA)-COM (-VE)
C4 (InB-Inc) COM (+VE)
C5 Opto I/P-InB
C6 Opto I/P-InC
Logic Input C7 Opto I/P-In1
C8 Opto I/P-In2
C9 Opto I/P-In3
C10 Opto I/P-In4
C11 Opto I/P-In5
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 327 of 335
ADR245B
C12 Opto I/P-In6

C13 Opto I/P-In7
C14 Opto I/P-In8
C15 Opto I/P-In9
C16 Opto I/P-InA
C17 – C18 OUT 1
C19 – C20 OUT 2
C21 – C22 OUT 3
C23 – C24 OUT 4
C26 – C27 – C28 OUT 5
Logic Output C29 – C30 OUT 6
C31 – C32 OUT 7
C33 – C34 OUT 8
C35 – C36 OUT 9
C37 – C38 OUT A
C39 – C40 OUT B
Step1. Connect all terminals as per the chart.
Step2. Adjust rated CT Secondary Current 1A/5A and Secondary Voltage. Observe the
current value from measurement menu. The actual current should match with relay
display.
Step3. Repeat the same procedure for other element.
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 328 of 335
ADR245B
Three phase Voltage & Current Measuring

Calculated Value Applied Value Measured value
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 329 of 335
ADR245B
Sequence Voltage & Current Measuring

Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 330 of 335
ADR245B
Power Measuring
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 331 of 335
ADR245B
11.5 Pick up and Trip Test:

1. Connect current source at R CT terminals 1A/5A current input terminal.
2. Set current setting value to 100% i.e. 1A/5A, TMS at Minimum (x0.02) value.
3. Start current injector to & increase current value till relay get pick up and trip. The
operating value should be within 1 to 1.1 times of set pickup value.
4. Select the Curve IEC S Inverse and Set the TMS at 1.00.
5. Connect the assigned trip contact to Timer.
6. Set and apply 2 times current value and measure the timing on timer.
7. The measured timing should be ±5% of actual timing (10.029 Sec).
8. Repeat the above procedure for remaining phases and Earth Fault.
Phase Protection Test: -

Setting Ip>1: ________ Ip>1 TMS =: _______
Threshold Theoretical Value Relay Value
Ip>1 Threshold ________A ________A
Ip>1 Drop Threshold ________A ________A
Time Delay Setting = _________

IDMT Characteristics = ________ 10 Times _________Sec. (take value from selected curve)
Threshold Relay
Time Delay at 2 times of ________ms ________ms
Ip>1 setting
Time Delay at 10 times of Ip>1 setting ________ms ________ms
Earth Protection Test: -

Setting 3Io>1: ________ 3Io>1 TMS = :_______
Threshold Theoretical Value Relay Value
3Io>1 Threshold ________A ________A
3Io>1 Drop Threshold ________A ________A
Time Delay Setting = _________

IDMT Characteristics = __________ 10 Times _________Sec.
Threshold Relay
Time Delay at 2 times of 3Io>1 setting ________ms ________ms
Time Delay at 10 times of 3Io>1 setting ________ms ________ms
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 332 of 335
ADR245B
Direction Test:
Set IP>1 Enable = +Dir
IP>1 = 50%
IP>1 TMS = 00.02
IP>1 CURVE = 0001
Phase MTA = 0
1. Apply current to R phase through current injector.

2. Apply voltage to Y PT & B PT through voltage source
3. Relay will execute trip command & latches fault .( in this
4. Now set IP>> Enable = -Dir & apply both current, voltage to the relay
Testing of Binary Input:

1. The Binary inputs shall be tested by applying 19-230V DC voltage to respective binary input
terminals.
2. Observed binary input status in Status menu on LCD display
3. Following are the binary inputs terminals
Binary Input Terminals Binary Input

C3 In1-A COM (-VE)
C4 InB-C COM (+VE)
C5 Opto I/P-InB
C6 Opto I/P- InC
C7 Opto I/P-In1
C8 Opto I/P-In2
C9 Opto I/P-In3
C10 Opto I/P- In4
C11 Opto I/P- In5
C12 Opto I/P- In6
C13 Opto I/P- In7
C14 Opto I/P- In8
C15 Opto I/P- In9
C16 Opto I/P- InA
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 333 of 335
ADR245B
11.6 Testing of Binary Output:

Output Contact Test:
1. Assign Relay RL1 to RLA for any Status input i.e. S-1 to SA
2. Then Apply voltage to respective Status input so the respective relay is operates.
3. After tripping, check continuity in between NC, NO and C output contact terminal.
4. After the Remove voltage of status input respective relay is reset.
5. Again check the continuity in between NC, NO and C output contact terminal.
Binary Output Terminals Binary Output
C17 – C18 OUT 1
C19 – C20 OUT 2
C21 – C22 OUT 3
C23 – C24 OUT 4
C26 – C27 – C28 OUT 5
C29 – C30 OUT 6
C31 – C32 OUT 7
C33 – C34 OUT 8
C35 – C36 OUT 9
C37 – C38 OUT A
C39 – C40 OUT B
11.7 LED Test:

1. Then Apply voltage to respective Status input so the respective LED is operates.
2. After the Remove voltage of status input respective LED is off
3. Assign Relay LED-L2 to LED-L8 for any Status input i.e. In1 to InA
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 334 of 335
ADR245B
REVISION CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Brief description of Revision
01 04.04.2016 Original Version
Ref ID : ADR245B/IM/RS
Rev No. : 01
Page No. : 335 of 335

IM ADR245B Feeder Protection20!4!2016

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

IM ADR245B Feeder Protection20!4!2016

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

ADR245B

Feeder Protection Relay

other experienced protective relaying applications.

SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION

HEALTHY AND SAFETY

Qualified personnel are individuals who

SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (Earth*) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Protection Class I Equipment

Accidental touching of exposed terminals

Removal of the equipment front panel / cover

UL and CSA/CUL Listed or Recognized equipment

Equipment operating conditions

Current transformer circuits

External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs)

Insulation and dielectric strength testing

Insertion of modules and PCB cards

Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards

Fiber optic communication

DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Protective Fuse Rating

Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety standards.

Compliance demonstrated by reference to safety standards

Sr. No. Description Page No.

Section 2 : Installation and Procedure

Sr. No. Description Page No.

Section 3 : PC SOFTWARE INFORMATION

Sr. No. Description Page No.

3.1.1 RTV2 Software Features 60

3.11 History Faults 87

Section 4 : PROTECTION FUNCTION & LOGIC FUNCTIONS

Sr. No. Description Page No.

4.14 Breaker Failure Setting (50BF) 126

Section 5 : MEASUREMENT SHEET

Sr. No. Description Page No.

Section 6 : SETTING SHEET

Sr. No. Description Page No.

Sr. No. Description Page No.

Section 8 : USER GUIDE

Sr. No. Description Page No.

8.7.2 To View – General Settings 204

8.20.1 To Set – Reclosing 244

Section 9 : FLOW CHART

Sr. No. Description Page No.

9.6.1 To Set – IP Configuration 274

Section 10 : ANALYZING EVENT AND DISTURBANCE RECORD

Sr. No. Description Page No.

Section 11 : TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

Sr. No. Description Page No.

1 INTRODUCTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

Model and Options

Fig1: Radial feeder application

Fig2: Parallel Transformer feeder application

1.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

I. Measurement Accuracy Typical ± 2% at In for Phase and EF

II. Nominal Frequency Range 50/60 Hz (Selectable in ADR245B Menu)

III. Frequency measurement 45 Hz – 65 Hz

IV. Phase rotation ABC

I. CT secondary 1 / 5 Amp. (Selectable)

II. Nominal Burden at In < 0.20 VA at rated current (In)

IV. Measurement Linearity Linier up to 40 In

Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal.